Smoke Management Application Guide: 574-465 Rev. F

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 196

Smoke Management

Application Guide

574-465
Rev. F
Acknowledgements

Acknowledgements Tyco Safety Products – Westminster, gratefully acknowledges the contributions of the following
organizations to this publication:

 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.


(ASHRAE), Atlanta, GA.
 Andover Controls Corporation, Andover, MA.
 Center for Fire Research, National Engineering Laboratory, National Bureau of Standards,
U.S. Department of Commerce, Washington, DC.
 Integrated Systems, Inc., Brunswick, MD.
 National Fire Protection Association, Inc. (NFPA), Quincy, MA.
 U.S. Veterans Administration, Office of Construction, Washington, DC.

iii
Cautions and Warnings

Cautions and READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS- Follow the instructions in this installation
Warnings manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated
equipment. Product operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.

DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED.


Upon unpacking your product, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify an authorized Simplex®
product supplier.

ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal
adjustments or repairs. All repairs should be performed by a representative or authorized agent of
your local Simplex product supplier.

STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows:


1. Ground yourself before opening or installing components.
2. Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.

FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS – PART 15 - This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.

iv
Copyright and Trademarks

Copyrights 2004 - 2012 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved.
Specifications and other information shown were current as of publication and are subject to
change without notice.

To further the science of Smoke Management, Tyco Safety Products hereby grants permission to
reproduce or transmit this reference document in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, for the purpose of obtaining information on the science of Smoke Management.
We retain the rights of our respective trademarks.

Trademarks TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered
marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

v
Table of Contents

Acknowledgements .................................................................................................. iii 


Acknowledgements ............................................................................................... iii 

Cautions and Warnings ............................................................................................ iv 


Cautions and Warnings ......................................................................................... iv 

Copyright and Trademarks ..................................................................................... vii 


Copyrights ............................................................................................................ vii 
Trademarks .......................................................................................................... vii 

About This Guide ..................................................................................................... xv 


Conventions Used ................................................................................................ xv 

CHAPTER 1 . HOW SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEMS WORK ....................................... 1-1 


Purpose .............................................................................................................. 1-1 
Introduction ......................................................................................................... 1-1 
In this Chapter .................................................................................................... 1-1 

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 1-2 


Design Parameters ............................................................................................. 1-2 
Design Concepts ................................................................................................ 1-2 

Controlling Smoke Movement ............................................................................... 1-3 


Basic Concept .................................................................................................... 1-3 
Creating Smoke Zones ....................................................................................... 1-5 
Causes of Smoke Movement ............................................................................. 1-6 
Managing Smoke Movement .............................................................................. 1-7 

Principles of Smoke Control Systems .................................................................. 1-8 


System Types ..................................................................................................... 1-8 
Maintaining System Integrity .............................................................................. 1-8 

Smoke Control and Fire Control System Differences ......................................... 1-9 


Separate System for Separate Goals................................................................. 1-9 

Designing a Smoke Control System ................................................................... 1-10 


Basic Goal ........................................................................................................ 1-10 
How to Begin .................................................................................................... 1-10 
Engineering Responsibility ............................................................................... 1-10 
Creating the Zone-By-Zone Smoke Control Plan ............................................. 1-10 
Determining the Smoke Containment Pressure ............................................... 1-11 
Separating Smoke Zones Properly .................................................................. 1-11 
Selecting the Proper Fans and Duct Work ....................................................... 1-11 
Choosing the Proper Dampers ......................................................................... 1-12 
Placing Air Inlets and Outlets ........................................................................... 1-12 

Designing a Dedicated Smoke Control System ................................................. 1-13 


Introduction ....................................................................................................... 1-13 
About Stairtowers ............................................................................................. 1-13 
Designing the Ideal Stairtower System ............................................................ 1-14 
Ensuring Doors Can Open ............................................................................... 1-14 
Controlling Pressure in a Stairtower ................................................................. 1-15 
Elevator Smoke Control.................................................................................... 1-18 
vii
Detecting Smoke ................................................................................................... 1-19 
Introduction ....................................................................................................... 1-19 
Configuring and Monitoring a Smoke Control System ..................................... 1-19 
Firefighter Smoke Control Station (FSCS) ....................................................... 1-19 
Testing the System ........................................................................................... 1-20 
Related Documentation .................................................................................... 1-20 

CHAPTER 2 . SMOKE CONTROL DESIGN PARAMETERS ....................................... 2-1 


Introduction ......................................................................................................... 2-1 
In this Chapter .................................................................................................... 2-1 

System Requirements ............................................................................................ 2-2 


General Requirements ....................................................................................... 2-2 
Agency Requirements ........................................................................................ 2-2 

System Design Parameters.................................................................................... 2-3 


Verifying System Integrity During Non-Emergency Conditions .......................... 2-3 
Weekly Self-Test ................................................................................................ 2-3 
Verifying System Integrity During Emergency Conditions.................................. 2-3 
Automatic Activation ........................................................................................... 2-3 
Subsequent Automatic Activation....................................................................... 2-4 
Automatic Activation by a Manual Pull Box ........................................................ 2-4 
Manual Operation ............................................................................................... 2-4 
Automatic Override of Manual Activation ........................................................... 2-4 
TSW FSCS Building Size ................................................................................... 2-4 

CHAPTER 3 . SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS ..................................... 3-1 


Introduction ......................................................................................................... 3-1 
In this Chapter .................................................................................................... 3-1 

Smoke Control System – Wall-Mounted Graphic FSCS ..................................... 3-2 


Smoke Control System – Wall-Mounted Graphic FSCS .................................... 3-2 

Smoke Control System – TSW Type FSCS .......................................................... 3-3 


Smoke Control System – TSW Type FSCS ....................................................... 3-3 

4100U/4100ES/4010ES Panels ............................................................................... 3-4 


4100U/4100ES/ 4010ES Panels ........................................................................ 3-4 

4190 TrueSite Workstation System and 24 Point I/O Graphic Interface ............ 3-5 
4190 TrueSite Workstation (TSW) (Non-FSCS) ................................................ 3-5 
24-Point I/O Graphic Interface (4100-7401) ....................................................... 3-5 

Optional and Peripheral System Components .................................................... 3-6 


Optional System Components ............................................................................ 3-6 
Peripheral Components ...................................................................................... 3-6 

Firefighter Smoke Control Station ........................................................................ 3-7 


Wall-Mounted Graphic Firefighter Smoke Control Station (FSCS) .................... 3-7 
FSCS Ordering Information ................................................................................ 3-9 
About the FACP................................................................................................ 3-10 
TrueSite Workstation (TSW) as an FSCS ........................................................ 3-10 
FSCS Setup for Single Monitor ........................................................................ 3-11 
FSCS/TSW Setup for Dual Monitors ................................................................ 3-12 

CHAPTER 4 . INSTALLING THE SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................. 4-1 


Introduction ......................................................................................................... 4-1 
viii
In this Chapter .................................................................................................... 4-1 

General Smoke Control Interconnections ............................................................ 4-2 


Overview ............................................................................................................. 4-2 
UUKL Addressable Monitor/Control Devices for 4100U, 4100ES and 4010ES. 4-3 
Reference Information ........................................................................................ 4-4 
Four Story Building Smoke Control Example ..................................................... 4-5 

Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring ............................................................ 4-6 


Overview ............................................................................................................. 4-6 
Dedicated Damper Control ................................................................................. 4-6 
Dedicated Fan Control........................................................................................ 4-8 

Non-Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring Diagrams ................................ 4-10 


Overview ........................................................................................................... 4-10 
Non-Dedicated Damper Control ....................................................................... 4-10 
Non Dedicated Fan Control .............................................................................. 4-13 

CHAPTER 5 . SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEM PROGRAMS, WALL-MOUNTED


GRAPHICS ...................................................................................................................... 5-1 
Introduction ......................................................................................................... 5-1 
In this Chapter .................................................................................................... 5-1 

Smoke Control Program Requirements ............................................................... 5-2 


Introduction ......................................................................................................... 5-2 
Emergency Operation......................................................................................... 5-2 
Automatic Program ............................................................................................. 5-2 
Dedicated Smoke Control System Weekly Self-Test ......................................... 5-2 

Dedicated Smoke Control System Weekly Self-Test........................................... 5-3 


Custom Control Programming Example ............................................................. 5-3 
Equation 1: Start Self-Test ................................................................................. 5-3 
Equation 2: Turn ON Stair Pressure Fan ........................................................... 5-3 
Equation 3: Test Stairwell Air Pressure .............................................................. 5-4 
Equation 4: Reset Stair Pressure Fan to OFF ................................................... 5-4 
Equation 5: End of Program ............................................................................... 5-4 

Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations ............................................ 5-5 


Introduction ......................................................................................................... 5-5 
Smoke Control System CC Equation Summary ................................................. 5-5 
Equation 1: Set Up Normal Conditions at Startup .............................................. 5-7 
Equation 2: Clear Faults on Startup ................................................................... 5-7 
Equation 3: Set Normal Conditions at Reset ...................................................... 5-8 
Equation 4: Set Normal Conditions at Reset ...................................................... 5-8 
Equation 5: Initialize Normal Conditions at Reset .............................................. 5-9 
Equation 6: Normal Conditions Complete After Reset ....................................... 5-9 
Equation 7: Smoke Control Initiate ................................................................... 5-10 
Equation 8: Smoke Control Reset .................................................................... 5-10 
Equation 9: Initiate Smoke Zone 1 .................................................................. 5-10 
Equation 10: Activate Smoke Control Zone 1 .................................................. 5-11 
Equation 11: Initiate Smoke Zone 2 ................................................................. 5-11 
Equation 12: Activate Smoke Control Zone 2 .................................................. 5-12 
Equation 13: Initiate Smoke Zone 3 ................................................................. 5-12 
Equation 14: Activate Smoke Control Zone 3 .................................................. 5-13 
Equation 15: Initiate Smoke Zone 4 ................................................................. 5-13 
Equation 16: Activate Smoke Control Zone 4 .................................................. 5-14 
Equation 17: Supply Fan Duct Smoke Alarm ................................................... 5-14 
Equation 18: Stair Press Fan Duct Smoke Alarm ............................................ 5-14 
ix
Equation 19: Report TBL if Supply Fan Not ON ............................................... 5-15 
Equation 20: Report TBL if Supply Fan Not OFF ............................................. 5-15 
Equation 21: Report TBL if Exhaust Fan Not ON ............................................. 5-15 
Equation 22: Report TBL if Exhaust Fan Not OFF ........................................... 5-15 
Equation 23: Report TBL if Stair Press Fan Not ON ........................................ 5-16 
Equation 24: Report TBL if Stair Press Fan Not OFF ...................................... 5-16 
Equation 25: Report TBL if Main EXH Damper Not Open ............................... 5-16 
Equation 26: Report TBL if Main EXH Damper Not Closed ............................. 5-16 
Equation 27: Report TBL if Main SUP Damper Not Open ............................... 5-17 
Equation 28: Report TBL if Main SUP Damper Not Closed ............................. 5-17 
Equation 29: Report TBL if Main RET Damper Not Open................................ 5-17 
Equation 30: Report TBL if Main RET Damper Not Closed ............................. 5-17 
Equation 31: Report TBL If SUP Damper 1 Not Open ..................................... 5-18 
Equation 32: Report TBL If SUP Damper 1 Not Closed................................... 5-18 
Equation 33: Report TBL If SUP Damper 2 Not Open ..................................... 5-18 
Equation 34: Report TBL If Sup Damper 2 Not Closed.................................... 5-18 
Equation 35: Report TBL If SUP Damper 3 Not Open ..................................... 5-19 
Equation 36: Report TBL If SUP Damper 3 Not Closed................................... 5-19 
Equation 37: Report TBL If SUP Damper 4 Not Open ..................................... 5-19 
Equation 38: Report TBL If SUP Damper 4 Not Closed................................... 5-19 
Equation 39: Report TBL if EXH Damper 1 Not Open ..................................... 5-20 
Equation 40: Report TBL If EXH Damper 1 Not Closed................................... 5-20 
Equation 41: Report TBL If EXH Damper 2 Not Open ..................................... 5-20 
Equation 42: Report TBL If EXH Damper 2 Not Closed................................... 5-20 
Equation 43: Report TBL If EXH Damper 3 Not Open ..................................... 5-21 
Equation 44: Report TBL If EXH Damper 3 Not Closed................................... 5-21 
Equation 45: Report TBL If EXH Damper 4 Not Open ..................................... 5-21 
Equation 46: Report TBL If EXH Damper 4 Not Closed................................... 5-21 
Equation 47: Manual Control SUP AIR Damper 1 Open.................................. 5-22 
Equation 48: Manual Control SUP Air Damper 1 Close ................................... 5-22 
Equation 49: Manual Control SUP Air Damper 2 Open ................................... 5-22 
Equation 50: Manual Control SUP Air Damper 2 Close ................................... 5-22 
Equation 51: Manual Control SUP Air Damper 3 Open ................................... 5-23 
Equation 52: Manual Control SUP Air Damper 3 Close ................................... 5-23 
Equation 53: Manual Control SUP Air Damper 4 Open ................................... 5-23 
Equation 54: Control SUP Air Damper 4 Close ................................................ 5-23 
Equation 55: Manual Control EXH Air Damper 1 Open ................................... 5-24 
Equation 56: Manual Control EXH Air Damper 1 Close ................................... 5-24 
Equation 57: Manual Control EXH Air Damper 2 Open ................................... 5-24 
Equation 58: Manual Control EXH Air Damper 2 Close ................................... 5-24 
Equation 59: Control EXH Air Damper 3 Open ................................................ 5-25 
Equation 60: Manual Control EXH Air Damper 3 Close ................................... 5-25 
Equation 61: Manual Control EXH Air Damper 4 Open ................................... 5-25 
Equation 62: Manual Control EXH Air Damper 4 Close ................................... 5-25 
Equation 63: Manual Control Stair Press Fan ON ........................................... 5-26 
Equation 64: Manual Control Stair Press Fan OFF.......................................... 5-26 
Equation 65: Manual Control Main Supply Fan ON ......................................... 5-26 
Equation 66: Manual Control Main Supply Fan OFF ....................................... 5-26 
Equation 67: Manual Control Main RET Air Damper Open.............................. 5-27 
Equation 68: Manual Control Main RET Air Damper Close ............................. 5-27 
Equation 69: Manual Control Main Exhaust Fan ON ....................................... 5-27 
Equation 70: Manual Control Main Exhaust Fan OFF ..................................... 5-27 
Equation 71: Manual Control Main SUP Air Damper Open ............................. 5-28 
Equation 72: Manual Control Main Sup Air Damper Close .............................. 5-28 
Equation 73: Manual Control Main EXH Air Damper Open ............................. 5-28 
Equation 74: Manual Control Main EXH Air Damper Close ............................. 5-28 
Equation 75: Manual Control Clear Faults ....................................................... 5-29 
Equation 76: Master Key-Switch ...................................................................... 5-29 
Equation 77: Turn SONALERT ON .................................................................. 5-30 
x
Equation 78: Turn SONALERT OFF ................................................................ 5-30 

CHAPTER 6 . SINGLE AND DUAL MONITOR SETUP/PROGRAMMING .................. 6-1 


Introduction ......................................................................................................... 6-1 
In this Chapter .................................................................................................... 6-1 

Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming ..................................................... 6-2 


FSCS Application ............................................................................................... 6-2 
Graphic Screen Setup ........................................................................................ 6-4 
Captive Mode Setup ........................................................................................... 6-5 
Programming Application Options ...................................................................... 6-6 
Fire, Pri2, Supervisory and Trouble Icons .......................................................... 6-7 
Single and Dual Monitor Test Screen Icon Setup ............................................ 6-10 

CHAPTER 7 . 4100ES AND TSW (FSCS) PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES .................. 7-1 


Introduction ......................................................................................................... 7-1 
In this Chapter .................................................................................................... 7-1 

TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples ................................................................... 7-2 


Single Monitor and Dual Monitor Programming Example .................................. 7-2 
Programming TSW Features .............................................................................. 7-8 
Programming for Individual Dampers ............................................................... 7-12 
Programming for Individual Fans ..................................................................... 7-16 
Programming for Individual Air Flow Indicator Arrows ..................................... 7-21 
4100ES CC Equation Summary – Program 3 .................................................. 7-22 
Equation 3-1: Set Normal Conditions at Startup .............................................. 7-24 
Equation 3-2: Set Normal Conditions at Reset ................................................ 7-25 
Equation 3-3: Report Trouble if Switches not in Automatic .............................. 7-26 
Equation 3-4: Initialize Normal Conditions at Reset ......................................... 7-26 
Equation 3-5: Smoke Control Initiate................................................................ 7-28 
Equation 3-6: Smoke Control Reset ................................................................. 7-28 
Equation 3-7: Initiate Smoke Zone 1 ................................................................ 7-29 
Equation 3-8: Activate Smoke Control Zone 1 ................................................ 7-29 
Equation 3-9: Initiate Smoke Zone 2 ................................................................ 7-30 
Equation 3-10: Activate Smoke Control Zone 2 .............................................. 7-30 
Equation 3-11: Initiate Smoke Zone 3 .............................................................. 7-31 
Equation 3-12: Activate Smoke Control Zone 3 .............................................. 7-31 
Equation 3-13: Initiate Smoke Zone 4 .............................................................. 7-32 
Equation 3-14: Activate Smoke Control Zone 4 .............................................. 7-32 
Equation 3-15: Report Trouble if Supply Fan not ON ...................................... 7-33 
Equation 3-16: Report Trouble if Supply Fan not OFF..................................... 7-33 
Equation 3-17: Report Trouble if Exhaust Fan not ON .................................... 7-34 
Equation 3-18: Report Trouble if Exhaust Fan not OFF................................... 7-34 
Equation 3-19: Report Trouble if Stair Pressure Fan not ON........................... 7-34 
Equation 3-20: Report Trouble if Stair Pressure Fan not OFF ......................... 7-34 
Equation 3-21: Report Trouble if Main Exhaust Damper not OPEN ................ 7-35 
Equation 3-22: Report Trouble if Main Exhaust Damper not CLOSED ........... 7-35 
Equation 3-23: Report Trouble if Main Supply Damper not OPEN .................. 7-35 
Equation 3-24: Report Trouble if Main Supply Damper not CLOSED ............. 7-35 
Equation 3-25: Report Trouble if Main Return Damper not OPEN .................. 7-36 
Equation 3-26: Report Trouble if Main Return Damper not CLOSED.............. 7-36 
Equation 3-27: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 1A not OPEN ..................... 7-36 
Equation 3-28: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 1A not CLOSED ................. 7-36 
Equation 3-29: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 1B not OPEN ..................... 7-37 
Equation 3-30: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 1B not CLOSED ................. 7-37 
Equation 3-31: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 2A not OPEN ..................... 7-37 
Equation 3-32: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 2A not CLOSED ................. 7-37 

xi
Equation 3-33: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 2B not OPEN ..................... 7-38 
Equation 3-34: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 2B not CLOSED ................. 7-38 
Equation 3-35: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 1A not OPEN ................... 7-38 
Equation 3-36: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 1A not CLOSED ............... 7-38 
Equation 3-37: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 1B not OPEN ................... 7-39 
Equation 3-38: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 1B not Closed .................. 7-39 
Equation 3-39: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 2A not OPEN ................... 7-39 
Equation 3-40: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 2A not CLOSED ............... 7-39 
Equation 3-41: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 2B not OPEN ................... 7-40 
Equation 3-42: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 2B not CLOSED ............... 7-40 
Equation 3-43: 1st Floor Area A Pressurization Status Led .............................. 7-40 
Equation 3-44: 1st Floor Area A Exhaust Status Led........................................ 7-40 
Equation 3-45: 1st Floor Area A Fault Status Led ............................................. 7-41 
Equation 3-46: 1st Floor Area B Pressurization Status Led .............................. 7-41 
Equation 3-47: 1st Floor Area B Exhaust Status Led........................................ 7-41 
Equation 3-48: 1st Floor Area B Fault Status Led ............................................. 7-42 
Equation 3-49: 2nd Floor Area A Pressurization Status Led ............................. 7-42 
Equation 3-50: 2nd Floor Area A Exhaust Status Led ....................................... 7-42 
Equation 3-51: 2nd Floor Area A Fault Status Led ............................................ 7-43 
Equation 3-52: 2nd Floor Area B Pressurization Status Led ............................. 7-43 
Equation 3-53: 2nd Floor Area B Exhaust Status Led ....................................... 7-43 
Equation 3-54: 2nd Floor Area B Fault Status Led ............................................ 7-44 
Equation 3--55: Manual Control Stair Pressurization Auto............................... 7-44 
Equation 3-56: Reset the pri to 9 for Stair Fan Auto ........................................ 7-44 
Equation 3-57: Manual Control Stair Fan ON .................................................. 7-44 
Equation 3-58: Manual Control Stair Fan OFF ................................................. 7-45 
Equation 3-59: Stairwell Fan Automatic Status Led ......................................... 7-45 
Equation 3-60: Stairwell Fan ON Status Led.................................................... 7-45 
Equation 3-61: Stairwell Fan OFF Status Led .................................................. 7-45 
Equation 3-62: Manual Control Main Supply Fan Auto .................................... 7-46 
Equation 3-63: Reset the pri to 9 for Main Supply Fan Auto ............................ 7-46 
Equation 3-64: Manual Control Main Supply Fan ON ...................................... 7-46 
Equation 3-65: Manual Control Main Supply Fan OFF .................................... 7-46 
Equation 3-66: Main Supply Automatic Status Led .......................................... 7-47 
Equation 3-67: Main Supply Fan ON Status Led ............................................. 7-47 
Equation 3-68: Main Supply Fan OFF Status Led ........................................... 7-47 
Equation 3-69: Manual Control Main Exhaust Fan Auto .................................. 7-47 
Equation 3-70: Reset the pri to 9 for Main Exhaust Fan Auto .......................... 7-48 
Equation 3-71: Manual Control Main Exhaust Fan ON .................................... 7-48 
Equation 3-72: Manual Control Main Exhaust Fan OFF .................................. 7-48 
Equation 3-73: Main Exhaust Fan Automatic Status Led................................. 7-48 
Equation 3-74: Main Exhaust Fan ON Status Led ........................................... 7-49 
Equation 3-75: Main Exhaust Fan OFF Status Led ......................................... 7-49 
Equation 3-76: Main Supply Damper Auto ....................................................... 7-49 
Equation 3-77: Reset the pri to 9 for Main Supply Damper Auto ..................... 7-49 
Equation 3-78: Manual Control Main Supply Damper OPEN........................... 7-50 
Equation 3-79: Manual Control Main Supply Damper CLOSED ...................... 7-50 
Equation 3-80: Main Supply Damper Automatic Status Led ............................ 7-50 
Equation 3-81: Main Supply Damper OPEN Status Led .................................. 7-50 
Equation 3-82: Main Supply Damper CLOSED Status Led ............................. 7-51 
Equation 3-83: Manual Return Air Damper Auto .............................................. 7-51 
Equation 3-84: Reset the pri to 9 for Main Return Damper Auto ..................... 7-51 
Equation 3-85: Manual Control Main Return Air Damper OPEN ..................... 7-51 
Equation 3-86: Manual Control Main Return Air Damper CLOSED ................. 7-51 
Equation 3-88: Main Return Air Damper Open Status Led .............................. 7-52 
Equation 3-89: Main Return Air Damper CLOSED Status Led ........................ 7-52 
Equation 3-90: Manual Control Exhaust Air Damper Auto ............................... 7-52 
Equation 3-91: Reset the pri to 9 for Main Exhaust Damper Auto ................... 7-53 
Equation 3-92: Manual Control Exhaust Air Damper OPEN ............................ 7-53 
xii
Equation 3-93: Manual Control Exhaust Air Damper CLOSED ....................... 7-53 
Equation 3-94: Main Exhaust Air Damper Automatic Status............................ 7-53 
Equation 3-95: Main Exhaust Air Damper OPEN Status ................................. 7-54 
Equation 3-96: Main Exhaust Air Damper CLOSED Status ............................. 7-54 
Equation 3-97: Manual control 1st Floor Area A Automatic .............................. 7-54 
Equation 3-98: Automatic Pri 9......................................................................... 7-54 
Equation 3-99: Manual control 1st Floor Area A Pressurize ............................. 7-54 
Equation 3-99: Manual control 1st Floor Area A Pressurize ............................. 7-55 
Equation 3-100: Manual control 1st Floor Area A Exhaust ............................... 7-55 
Equation 3-101: Manual control 1st Floor Area B Automatic ............................ 7-55 
Equation 3-102: Automatic Pri 9....................................................................... 7-56 
Equation 3-103: Manual control 1st Floor Area B Pressurize ........................... 7-56 
Equation 3-104: Manual control 1st Floor Area B Exhaust ............................... 7-56 
Equation 3-105: Manual control 2nd Floor Area A Automatic ........................... 7-57 
Equation 3-106: Automatic Pri 9....................................................................... 7-57 
Equation 3-107: Manual control 2nd Floor Area A Pressurize .......................... 7-57 
Equation 3-108: Manual control 2nd Floor Area A Exhaust .............................. 7-58 
Equation 3-109: Manual control 2nd Floor Area B Automatic ........................... 7-58 
Equation 3-110: Automatic Pri 9....................................................................... 7-59 
Equation 3-111: Manual control 2nd Floor Area B Pressurize .......................... 7-59 
Equation 3-112: Manual control 2nd Floor Area B Exhaust .............................. 7-59 
Equation 3-113: Track ALL Automatic.............................................................. 7-60 
Equation 3-114: P533 ....................................................................................... 7-60 
Equation 3-115: All auto change to Pri 2,9 ....................................................... 7-61 
4100ES CC Equation Summary – Program 4 ................................................. 7-61 
Equation 1: Pressurization Indication On 1st Flr A........................................... 7-61 
Equation 2: Pressurization Indication On 1st Flr B........................................... 7-61 
Equation 3: Pressurization Indication On 2nd Flr A .......................................... 7-62 
Equation 4: Pressurization Indication On 2nd Flr B .......................................... 7-62 
Equation 5: Exhaust Indication On 1st Flr A ..................................................... 7-62 
Equation 6: Exhaust Indication On 1st Flr B ..................................................... 7-62 
Equation 7: Exhaust Indication On 2nd Flr A .................................................... 7-63 
Equation 8: Exhaust Indication On 2nd Flr B ..................................................... 7-63 
4100ES CC Equation Summary – Program 5 ................................................. 7-63 
Equation 1: Supply Damper 1A Open Status ................................................... 7-64 
Equation 2: Supply Damper 1A Closed Status ................................................ 7-64 
Equation 3: Exhaust Damper 1A Open Status ................................................. 7-65 
Equation 4: Exhaust Fan Damper 1A Closed Status ....................................... 7-65 
Equation 5: Supply Damper 1B Open Status ................................................... 7-65 
Equation 6: Supply Damper 1B Closed Status ................................................ 7-65 
Equation 7: Exhaust Damper 1B Open Status ................................................. 7-65 
Equation 8: Exhaust Fan Damper 1B Closed Status ....................................... 7-65 
Equation 9: Supply Damper 2A Open Status ................................................... 7-65 
Equation 10: Supply Damper 2A Closed Status .............................................. 7-66 
Equation 11: Exhaust Damper 2A Open Status ............................................... 7-66 
Equation 12: Exhaust Fan Damper 2A Closed Status ..................................... 7-66 
Equation 13: Supply Damper 2B Open Status ................................................. 7-66 
Equation 14: Supply Damper 2B Closed Status .............................................. 7-66 
Equation 15: Exhaust Damper 2B Open Status ............................................... 7-66 
Equation 16: Exhaust Fan Damper 2B Closed Status ..................................... 7-66 
Equation 17: Supply Damper 1A Manual Automatic ........................................ 7-67 
Equation 18: Reset the pri to 9 for supply 1A auto ........................................... 7-67 
Equation 19: Supply Damper 1A Manual Open ............................................... 7-67 
Equation 20: Supply Damper 1A Manual Close ............................................... 7-67 
Equation 21: Supply Damper 1A Automatic Status .......................................... 7-67 
Equation 22: Supply Damper 1B Manual Automatic ........................................ 7-68 
Equation 23: Reset the pri to 9 for supply 1B auto ........................................... 7-68 
Equation 24: Supply Damper 1B Manual Open ............................................... 7-68 
Equation 25: Supply Damper 1B Manual Close ............................................... 7-68 
xiii
Equation 26: Supply Damper 1B Automatic Status .......................................... 7-68 
Equation 27: Exhaust Damper 1A Manual Automatic ...................................... 7-69 
Equation 28: Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 1A auto ........................................ 7-69 
Equation 29: Exhaust Damper 1A Manual Open ............................................. 7-69 
Equation 30: Exhaust Damper 1A Manual Close ............................................. 7-69 
Equation 31: Exhaust Damper 1A Automatic Status........................................ 7-69 
Equation 32: Supply Damper 2A Manual Automatic ........................................ 7-70 
Equation 33: Reset the pri to 9 for supply 2A auto ........................................... 7-70 
Equation 34: Supply Damper 2A Manual Open ............................................... 7-70 
Equation 35: Supply Damper 2A Manual Close ............................................... 7-70 
Equation 36: Supply Damper 2A Automatic Status .......................................... 7-71 
Equation 37: Supply Damper 2B Manual Automatic ........................................ 7-71 
Equation 38: Reset the pri to 9 for supply 2B auto ........................................... 7-71 
Equation 39: Supply Damper 2B Manual Open ............................................... 7-71 
Equation 40: Supply Damper 2B Manual Close ............................................... 7-71 
Equation 41: Supply Damper 2B Automatic Status .......................................... 7-72 
Equation 42: Exhaust Damper 1B Manual Automatic ...................................... 7-72 
Equation 43: Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 1B auto ........................................ 7-72 
Equation 44: Exhaust Damper 1B Manual Open ............................................. 7-72 
Equation 45: Exhaust Damper 1B Manual Close ............................................. 7-72 
Equation 46: Exhaust Damper 1B Automatic Status........................................ 7-73 
Equation 47: Exhaust Damper 2A Manual Automatic ...................................... 7-73 
Equation 48: Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 2A auto ........................................ 7-73 
Equation 49: Exhaust Damper 2A Manual Open ............................................. 7-73 
Equation 50: Exhaust Damper 2A Manual Close ............................................. 7-73 
Equation 51: Exhaust Damper 2A Automatic Status........................................ 7-74 
Equation 52: Exhaust Damper 2B Manual Automatic ...................................... 7-74 
Equation 53: Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 2B auto ........................................ 7-74 
Equation 54: Exhaust Damper 2B Manual Open ............................................. 7-74 
Equation 55: Exhaust Damper 2B Manual Close ............................................. 7-74 
Equation 56: Exhaust Damper 2B Automatic Status........................................ 7-75 

CHAPTER 8 . GLOSSARY OF TERMS ........................................................................ 8-1 


Introduction ......................................................................................................... 8-1 
In this Chapter .................................................................................................... 8-1 

Glossary of Terms .................................................................................................. 8-2 


Glossary ............................................................................................................. 8-2 

Index ........................................................................................................................IN-1 

xiv
About This Guide

Conventions Used Before you start using the Smoke Management Application Guide, it is important to understand the
conventions used in this publication.
The following conventions are used to identify special names or text.
 Italic type indicates titles of publications, such as the Smoke Management Application Guide.
 Text enclosed in quotation marks indicates important terms or titles of chapters and sections
of the manual, such as “How to Use this Publication.”
 Bulleted lists, such as this one, provide you with information. They are also used to indicate
alternatives in numbered procedural steps.
 Numbered lists indicate procedures with steps that you must carry out sequentially.

xv
Chapter 1.
How Smoke Control Systems Work

Purpose The information in this guide serves to define the intended function of Smoke Control System
Equipment and also explain what operational and performance requirements are necessary for
equipment listed under the UL listing category of UUKL.

IMPORTANT: Smoke control systems must be designed to meet the custom


needs of a particular building and its occupants. This document
illustrates some basic, common smoke control applications, but is
not in lieu of a properly engineered smoke control system,
designed by a qualified Fire Protection Engineer.

This product is subject to change without notice. This document does not constitute any warranty,
express or implied. Tyco Safety Products reserves the right to alter capabilities, performance, and
presentation of this product at any time.

Introduction Many people are not aware that smoke is the major killer in fires. Smoke can travel to places in
buildings that are quite distant from the scene of the fire, threatening life and property. It can fill
stairwells and elevator shafts, blocking both evacuation and firefighting. Smoke control systems
reduce the number of smoke-related injuries and deaths. In addition, these systems reduce property
loss and damage caused by smoke.
Smoke control makes use of powered fans to produce air pressure that can control smoke
movement. Air pressure has been used in laboratories for over fifty years to prevent airborne
bacteria and poison gases from migrating from one area to another. It has also been used to control
the entrance of dust and other contaminants into computer rooms; and used in hospitals to prevent
the migration of harmful bacteria into sterile areas.
This chapter gives you an overview of smoke-control systems, including a discussion of the
driving forces of smoke movement, the principles of smoke control, and the concepts of smoke
control system design.

In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.

Topic See Page #


Introduction 1-2
Controlling Smoke Movement 1-3
Principles of Smoke Control Systems 1-8
Smoke Control and Fire Control System Differences 1-9
Designing a Smoke Control System 1-10
Designing a Dedicated Smoke Control System 1-13
Detecting Smoke 1-19

1-1
Introduction

Design Parameters A smoke control system can be designed to provide an escape route and/or safe zone.
However, all smoke control systems have the following design parameters:
 Air-flow paths through a building and leakage areas.
 Pressure differences across smoke control system boundaries.
 Door or vent openings in the boundary of a smoke control system.
 Airflow through openings in smoke control system boundaries.

Design Concepts The following factors can affect the design of a smoke control system:

System Flexibility:
System flexibility means using features that allow for easy adjustment of a particular system to
meet the demands of a given situation. For example, during the design and construction of a
building, leakage paths can be estimated. Thus, a smoke control system can only be designed to
provide theoretical protection from smoke. After the building is completed, the system must be
tuned to the actual pressure values. System flexibility is also useful when retrofitting smoke
control systems in existing buildings.
System Control:
A smoke control system should be designed to automatically activate, preferably by an alarm from
a smoke detection system in the fire zone. The advantage of this type of activation is that the
system is activated in the earliest stages of a fire. Smoke control systems should be activated after
the receipt of alarms from a properly designed smoke detection system.
Energy Conservation Management:
Energy conservation methods must be considered when designing a smoke control system.
A smoke control system must be designed to override the local heating, ventilation, and air
conditioning (HVAC) system, or energy management system in order to implement the desired
smoke control operations.
Use of Fire Suppression Systems:
Many fire protection schemes use automatic fire suppression systems. However, while the
functions of fire suppression and smoke control are both desirable, they are not intended to
substitute for each other.
Fire suppression systems are intended to limit the growth rate of a fire. Smoke control systems can
provide safe zones and tolerable conditions along exit routes, but can do little to control fire. In
addition to the obvious differences between the two systems, the way the systems interact must be
considered. For example, pressure differences and air flows are different in the various buildings
within a complex that is protected by a fire suppression system. A water spray from a sprinkler
might interfere with air flow to a smoke exhaust or an outside air pressure system or a smoke
control system could interfere with the performance of a gaseous agent (e.g., Carbon Dioxide or
Nitrogen) fire suppression system.
A general guideline is that the gaseous agent fire suppression system takes precedence over the
smoke control system. It is also desirable that the smoke control system be able to purge the
residual gases and smoke after the fire is extinguished, and replace them with fresh air. This is an
important life-safety consideration, since some fire-suppression gases are asphyxiates.

1-2
Controlling Smoke Movement

Basic Concept Regardless of the method, the basic concept behind controlling smoke is to use differences in air
pressure to minimize the spread of smoke and, if possible, vent it from the building.

You cannot confine smoke by simply closing all access ways (such as doors and vents) to the
room that has the fire in it. Even with these passages closed off, smoke can disperse throughout a
building via cracks, holes made for pipes and electrical wires, and spaces around doors and
windows. Smoke is driven through these small openings by the expanding gases from the fire.
Smoke can also be driven onto other floors by the “stack effect,” which causes air to rise in
buildings. The stack effect is caused by the difference in the interior and exterior temperature of
the building. The figure below shows how smoke can disperse throughout a building:

Second Floor Adjacent Room Adjacent Room Adjacent Room

SMOKE

First Floor
Adjacent Room Area On Fire Adjacent Room

Figure 1-1. Smoke Infiltrating Rooms Adjacent to the Fire

Continued on next page

1-3
Controlling Smoke Movement, Continued

Basic Concept Since smoke is carried by the movement of air, you can stop the spread of smoke throughout the
building by lowering the air pressure in the area containing the fire and by raising the air pressure
in the surrounding areas and floors. The difference in air pressure (also called the “Air Pressure
Differential”) between the smoke-filled area and the surrounding areas acts as a barrier to the
smoke, pushing it back into the smoke-filled area. The figure below shows how this works.
FigureTag FD4-465-01

POSITIVE POSITIVE POSITIVE


AIR PRESSURE AIR PRESSURE AIR PRESSURE

POSITIVE POSITIVE
AIR NEGATIVE AIR
PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE

POSITIVE POSITIVE POSITIVE


AIR PRESSURE AIR PRESSURE AIR PRESSURE

Figure 1-2. Applying Positive Air Pressure to Control Smoke

1. Lower the air pressure in a smoke-filled area by controlling the air flow into it and turning
ON the exhaust fans from the area to full capacity. This “Negative Air Pressure” technique
pulls the smoke out of the area and vents it outside of the building.

2. Pressurize the areas and floors surrounding the fire by turning OFF all exhaust systems
(including closing any exhaust dampers) and forcing supply air to those areas at full capacity,
creating zones of “Positive Air Pressure.” The air in the pressurized areas tends to leak into
the smoke zone, using the same cracks and holes that the smoke would use to get out. This
positive pressure airflow into the burning room keeps the smoke from spreading.

Continued on next page

1-4
Controlling Smoke Movement, Continued

Basic Concept 3. Turn OFF the air inlets and air returns of the areas that are neither being pressurized nor
depressurized (i.e., areas far away from the fire). Turning OFF the air return prevents the
smoke that is being vented into the return air system from coming into the smoke-free area.
In cases where there are large openings (such as an open doorway) between the area on fire
and an adjacent area, smoke can be confined by a large volume of air. Pumping large
amounts of air through the adjacent space creates a constant draft through the opening into the
smoke zone (as shown below).

AIR
SMOKE
A
CENTRIFUGAL FAN I
R
AIR

Figure 1-3. Confining Smoke with a Large Volume of Air

The draft through the open space keeps back the smoke, confining it to the smoke zone. The
amount of air required to keep the smoke from penetrating the open space is quite large. Avoid
this type of situation when possible.

Creating To contain smoke by using pressure, you must divide the building into “Smoke Control Zones.” A
Smoke Zones floor or several floors of the building can be considered a single zone or a single floor can be
broken into a number of zones. A zone must be separated from other zones by smoke dampers,
airtight doors, and smoke-proof barriers.

When a fire occurs, the smoke control system can then pressurize all of the zones around the zone
where the fire initiated (called the “Fire Zone”), isolating the smoke to that single zone.

If the smoke control system is non-dedicated, the layout of the smoke control zones should take
into consideration the layout of the HVAC system. You should place multiple areas served by the
same HVAC controls in the same smoke control zone. Also, the smoke control zones must
conform to any fire control zones that have been established, because the smoke detectors are tied
into the fire detection system. Also, keeping the smoke control zones and the fire control zones the
same makes it easier to coordinate the two systems.

1-5
Controlling Smoke Movement, Continued

Causes of The following forces affect smoke movement:


Smoke Movement
Stack Effect:
When the outside air temperature is colder than the temperature inside a building, there is often an
upward movement of air within the building. This air movement is most noticeable in stairwells,
elevator shafts, electrical risers, or mail chutes, and is referred to as “Normal Stack Effect.” This
phenomenon is most noticeable in tall buildings during winter, but can occur in a single story
building as well.
When the outside air temperature is warmer than the temperature inside a building, there is often a
downward movement of air within the building. This air movement is referred to as “Reverse
Stack Effect.”
In a building with normal stack effect, the existing air currents can move smoke a considerable
distance from the fire origin. If the fire is below the neutral plane of the shaft (i.e., an elevation
where the hydrostatic pressure inside the shaft equals the hydrostatic pressure outside the shaft),
smoke moves with the building air into and up the shaft. Once above the neutral plane, smoke
flows out of the shaft into the upper floors of the building.
Buoyancy:
Smoke from a high temperature fire has buoyancy due to its reduced density. In a building with
leakage in the ceiling of the fire room, this buoyancy-induced pressure can produce smoke
movement. In a fire room with only one opening to the building, air flows into the room while hot
smoke flows out of the room. If the fire room has open doors or windows, the pressure difference
across these openings is negligible because of the large flow areas involved. However, for a
tightly-sealed room, the pressure differences due to expansion may be important.

Wind:
Wind can also have a pronounced influence on smoke movement within a building. The effect of
wind velocity on the air movement within a well-constructed building is minimal. However, the
effects of wind can become important for loosely-constructed buildings or buildings with open
doors or windows.
Frequently in fires, a window breaks. If the window breaks on the side of the building away from
the wind (the leeward side), the negative pressure caused by the wind vents the smoke from the
fire room. This can greatly reduce smoke movement within the building. However, if the broken
window is on the windward side of the building, the positive pressure of the wind can force the
smoke throughout the fire floor, and possibly to other floors as well. This event can endanger lives
and hamper firefighters as well. Wind induced pressures can be quite large and can easily
dominate building air movement.

Continued on next page

1-6
Controlling Smoke Movement, Continued

Causes of HVAC System:


Smoke Movement
Before the development of smoke control systems, HVAC systems were shut down when a fire
occurred. This is because an HVAC system frequently transported smoke during building fires.
In the early stages of a fire, HVAC smoke transport can be a good thing. When a fire starts, the
HVAC system can transport the smoke to a location where people can smell it and be alerted to
the fire (although they may not know where the smoke is coming from). However, as the fire
progresses, the HVAC system transports the smoke to every area that it serves, endangering life in
all those places. To make matters worse, the HVAC system also supplies air to the fire, which aids
combustion.
Although shutting down the HVAC system prevents it from supplying air to the fire, this action
does not prevent the movement of smoke through the supply and return air ducts, air shafts, and
other building openings due to stack effect, buoyancy, or wind effect.

Managing “Smoke Movement Management” includes all of the methods that can be used to modify and
Smoke Movement control smoke movement for the benefit of the building occupants, firefighters, and for the
reduction of property damage. The use of barriers, smoke vents, and smoke shafts are traditional
methods of smoke management.
Barriers:
The effectiveness of barriers in limiting smoke movement depends on the leakage paths in the
barrier and on the pressure differential across the barrier. Holes where pipes penetrate floors or
walls, cracks around doors, and cracks in walls or between walls and floors are a few of the places
where smoke can leak through a barrier. The pressure differential across these barriers depends on
wind, buoyancy, stack effect, and the HVAC system.
Smoke Vents and Smoke Shafts:
The effectiveness of smoke vents and smoke shafts depends on their distance from the fire, the
buoyancy of the smoke, and the presence of other driving forces. In addition, when smoke is
sprinkler-cooled the effectiveness of smoke vents and smoke shafts is greatly reduced.
Elevator shafts in buildings have often been used as smoke shafts. The obvious problem with this
is that it prevents the elevator from being used for fire evacuation (because of the “piston effect”
of an elevator), and frequently allows the smoke to travel between floors. Specially designed
smoke shafts which have no leakage can be used to prevent the distribution of smoke to fire-free
floors.
In summary, the effectiveness of barriers in a traditional smoke management system is limited to
the extent that the barriers are free of leakage paths. Smoke vents and smoke shafts are limited by
the fact that the smoke must have sufficient buoyancy to overcome other forces that may be
present.
In the last few years, motorized fans have been used to overcome the limitations of the traditional
systems. The systems that employ these motorized fans are called “Smoke Control Systems.”
These Smoke Control Systems rely on creating air pressure differences and positive or negative
airflows to limit and control the movement of smoke and other noxious gases.

1-7
Principles of Smoke Control Systems

System Types Two types of smoke-control systems exist – Dedicated and Non-dedicated.

 Dedicated Smoke Control System: Is installed in a building for the sole purpose of
controlling smoke.
 Non-dedicated Smoke Control System: Uses parts of the building HVAC system to control
smoke.

In some cases, a building has both non-dedicated and dedicated systems. Non-dedicated systems
are used throughout the building for normal areas such as offices and manufacturing facilities.
Dedicated systems are used for special areas, such as elevator shafts, stairwells, stairtowers, and
other areas that need special smoke-handling techniques.

Smoke Control System products connect to HVAC equipment to form a system for controlling the
flow of smoke during a fire condition. Smoke-control systems are designed, installed, and
maintained so that a system remains effective and provides a “Tenable Environment” during
evacuation of the protected areas. A “Tenable Environment” as defined in NFPA 92A, is an
environment in which the quantity and location of smoke is limited or otherwise restricted to allow
for ready evacuation through the space.

Maintaining A major concern with any emergency signaling system, whether burglary, fire, or smoke control,
System Integrity is maintaining system integrity. This task is traditionally accomplished by electrical supervision of
wiring. However because the proper operation of the fans and dampers connected to the output
circuits may involve mechanical controls and pneumatic controls, as well as electrically-actuated
parts, end-process verification is provided. The end-process verification is provided to alert the
firefighter/operator that the fan or damper has operated in response to an automatic or manual
command issued during an emergency condition. While end-process verification confirms
operation during an emergency condition, system integrity during a non-emergency
(normal supervision) conditions is checked differently depending on whether the equipment is
non-dedicated or dedicated.

The operability of the non-dedicated smoke-control equipment is verified by the "comfort level" in
the areas that are served by the equipment. In other words, if the HVAC equipment is not
functioning properly, the building occupants are soon made aware of this and the problem can be
solved.

The operability of the dedicated smoke control equipment is verified by an automatic self-test that
is performed on a weekly basis.

1-8
Smoke Control and Fire Control System Differences

Separate System The smoke control system is usually separate from the fire control system, since they have
for Separate Goals different goals. The goal of the fire control system is to contain and extinguish the fire as fast as
possible. These systems, which halt the fire but not the smoke, are often triggered automatically,
relying on the heat of the fire to activate the system. Although smoke control systems are also
automatic, you must have manual overrides for the automatic controls.

A smoke control system may also be required to work with gas-based fire extinguishers, such as
gaseous agent systems installed in many computer rooms. If the smoke control system tries to vent
a room with such a system, it may vent the fire suppressing gas as well. Removing the gas lets the
fire continue burning. Also, pressurizing the areas surrounding an extinguisher equipped room
reduces the effectiveness of the system. Air forced into the room from the outside by pressure can
provide the fire with the oxygen it needs to continue burning. Therefore, gas-based fire
extinguishers and smoke control systems should not be active at the same time in the same
area.

The smoke control system receives the location of the fire from the fire panel. The fire panel uses
a combination of smoke and heat sensors to determine where the fire is located. As defined in
NFPA 92A: In the event that signals are received from more than one smoke zone, the smoke
control system will operate in the mode determined by the first signal received.

Specific, zoned smoke control strategies should never be triggered by manual pull boxes. The
risk of someone pulling a box someplace other than the fire zone is too high for you to trust your
smoke control system to this form of activation.

All smoke control systems installed in buildings must be in accordance with the standards
adopted by local codes. You can find additional information regarding fire alarm control units in
Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 864 and the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA®).

1-9
Designing a Smoke Control System

Basic Goal The basic goal of the smoke control system is to maintain a tenable environment. A tenable
environment allows:
 The building occupants to evacuate safely from the building.
 The firefighters to get quickly to the fire zone.

How to Begin The first step to take in designing a smoke control system is to lay out the smoke control zones,
as previously explained. After the smoke zones are established, address the following design
factors:
 The zone-by-zone smoke control plan.
 The amount of pressure needed to contain smoke.
 Proper separation between zones.
 The fans and duct work used in the smoke control system.
 Dampers required for smoke control.
 The air inlets and outlets used in the smoke control system.

Engineering Smoke control systems must be engineered by qualified personnel. Complete calculations of
Responsibility system designs are the responsibilities of the Engineer of Record and go beyond the scope of this
publication. A high level of coordination is required between the engineers, Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ), and system designers who are involved in the process.

Creating the You must create a smoke control plan for each zone in your building. Each smoke control zone
Zone-By-Zone plan consists of the number of steps the smoke control system must take to contain the smoke in
Smoke Control Plan the building zone. For each zone, you must decide:
 Whether you should depressurize the zone if a fire occurs.
 If the zone is to be depressurized, by how much you should depressurize it.
 Which adjacent zones should be pressurized and how much pressure is required.
Some zones in a building may need special consideration. As mentioned earlier, zones that have
gas fire extinguisher systems should not be vented (depressurized) and the zones surrounding the
fire zone with such a system should not be pressurized. You may not be able to pressurize other
areas, such as hospital labs or biological research labs, due to the risk of contaminating
surrounding areas with germs or toxins from these facilities.
Consider the number of zones surrounding the fire zone that should be pressurized. While, in
theory, all you need to do is to pressurize all of the zones immediately surrounding the fire zone, it
is possible that smoke can find a way around the pressurized areas and infiltrate distant zones.
Thus, depending on the size of the building and the capacity of the smoke control system, you may
decide to pressurize more zones.
Note: An increase in the number of zones to be pressurized means a corresponding increase in
the size of the air supply system.
Make certain to write down the state that all fans, dampers, and other smoke control equipment
should be in to control smoke in each zone. Then program this information into the smoke control
system.

1-10
Designing a Smoke Control System, Continued

Determining the Since air pressure is what keeps smoke from spreading, the primary design factors are the amount
Smoke Containment of pressure needed to confine the smoke, and the size of the system used to create this pressure.
Pressure
For the smoke control system to create a barrier of air pressure between the smoke zone and
surrounding zones, the amount of pressure required varies with the height of the ceiling and
whether or not the building has a sprinkler system. The table below gives examples of the
minimum pressure differential needed to keep smoke out of rooms surrounding the fire site as
defined in NFPA 92A.
Table 1-1. Examples of Fire Zone Minimum Pressure Differential

Minimum Pressure
Sprinkler System Ceiling Height Differential (in.)*

Yes Any 0.05 in.


No 9 ft. 0.10 in.
No 15 ft. 0.14 in.
No 21 ft. 0.18 in.

* in. = Inches, Water Gauge


Pressure buildup in an area depends on the amount of leakage. Leakage occurs through joints,
cracks, openings for pipes and wires, gaps between doors and their door jams, and so forth.
The better the zone is sealed off from neighboring zones, the easier it is to maintain the required
pressure. Since larger openings, like normally-open doorways, require large amounts of air to
maintain pressurization, you should avoid this type of situation.

Separating Smoke You must separate smoke zones from one another by “smoke barriers,” which prevent smoke from
Zones Properly passing through them. Smoke barriers can be a wall, a floor, or a ceiling. Any openings in the
smoke barrier must be closed with a smoke-proof fitting. For example, any duct work going
through a smoke barrier must have “smoke dampers” installed. A smoke damper is a damper that
prevents smoke from passing through it when fully closed. During a smoke emergency all of the
fittings should seal themselves, so that smoke cannot penetrate the barrier.
Since the smoke control zones should be the same as the fire control zones, you usually separate
your zones with a “fire-rated partition.” A fire-rated partition is a wall that is built of fire resistant
materials and that reaches from floor to ceiling. Different floors should be separated by a “fire-
rated ceiling,” a ceiling made of fire-resistant materials. Both fire-rated partitions and fire-rated
ceilings are rated for the amount of time they can withstand a fire. Any openings in a fire-rated
partition or ceiling must be capable of being sealed with a fire-rated closure, such as a fire-rated
door or fire damper.

Selecting the Proper The fans and duct work used in the smoke control system must be capable of providing the
Fans and Duct Work amount of pressure you calculated earlier. In a non-dedicated system, this may mean that you
need to install fans that have a higher capacity than the HVAC system normally requires. The
ducts must be capable of taking the pressurization (or the depressurization, for the fire zone's
return duct) that the smoke control system demands. Both the fans and the ducts should meet local
requirements such as those stated in NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems.

Continued on next page

1-11
Designing a Smoke Control System, Continued

Selecting the Proper Fans must be capable of reaching the required pressure setting within 60 seconds. Each fan must
Fans and Duct Work also have a pressure monitor so that the smoke control system can receive feedback on the status
of the fan to determine whether it is actually working. It is the responsibility of the system
designer to select duct work that meets the temperature and fire ratings for the specific application.

In some climates, the outside air can be so cold that drawing it directly inside the building for
pressurization can damage the building's interior fixtures or equipment (e.g., freeze pipes or
damage temperature-sensitive equipment). In these cases, some sort of pre-heater needs to be
installed on the air inlet. The smoke control system does not need to control this air intake heater
as closely as one on an HVAC system, since maintaining comfort levels is not an issue. It simply
has to make sure the air sent into an area is warm enough to not damage the building's equipment.

Choosing the The dampers used to isolate the smoke zone must be smoke dampers. Smoke dampers are dampers
Proper Dampers that meet the requirements given in UL 555S, Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in
Smoke Control Systems. Following this standard ensures that the dampers are able to block the
smoke when they are fully closed. These dampers may be different from those you might use in an
HVAC system that does not perform smoke control.
In a smoke control system, the dampers must be able to travel to their desired setting in a maximum
time of 75 seconds (see note below). All dampers must be fitted with end-position switches to
provide feedback to the smoke control system. These switches let the control system know the
position of the dampers, since smoke dampers are usually either fully-closed or fully-open.
Note: Local codes may specify a shorter maximum time.
Dampers sometimes function as both smoke dampers and fire dampers. Fire dampers are dampers
that block a fire from penetrating a fire-rated partition via a duct. These dampers are normally
open, held in place by a fusible link. The fusible link is a heat-sensitive device that releases the
dampers when it is heated to a certain temperature. Once the fusible link releases, the dampers
close by the force of gravity. This is required so that fire dampers operate even if the local electric
service has failed. The specifications for fire dampers appear in UL 555, Standard for Fire
Dampers.
If you want a damper to function as both a smoke damper and a fire damper, it must meet the
requirements for both devices. A damper can be operated by an electric motor or pneumatics.
However, it must have a fusible link or some other means of automatic closure (like a regular fire
damper). Since the control system can override the damper closure if the temperature warrants, the
damper needs the fusible link in case the damper’s automatic control is interrupted.

Placing Air Inlets You need to carefully consider the placement of the air inlets and outlets on your building. If you
and Outlets place an outlet that vents smoke too close to an air inlet, the air intake can draw the smoke back
into the building. Since smoke rises, the exhausts that vent smoke should be placed well above air
inlets. The exhausts should be placed several feet above the roof level to allow space for the
smoke to rise and disperse.
Keeping smoke outlets far away from air inlets does not guarantee that the air brought into the
building is always smoke free. You may want to place smoke detectors in air inlets that operate
during a smoke emergency.
Note: In some cases, smoke detection in the air inlet is required to have the capability of being
overridden by the responding authority after the situation has been investigated.
If the detector finds smoke in the incoming air, it alerts the control system. The control system
must then decide whether or not to shut down the air inlet.

1-12
Designing a Dedicated Smoke Control System

Introduction Most of the systems discussed so far have been non-dedicated systems. Even in a building where
the primary smoke control system is non-dedicated, special zones or functions may exist that
require a “dedicated” system. The most common example of a dedicated system is a dedicated
smoke control system for a stairtower.

About Stairtowers A “stairtower” is a stairwell with a ventilation system that is isolated from the main building.
The only connection between the building and the stairtower are fire-rated doors on each floor.
Since the building occupants should use the stairtower to leave during an evacuation, keeping the
stairtower smoke-free is vital.

A stairtower has its own dedicated system that pressurizes the stairtower to keep smoke out.
This dedicated system can take several forms, from a fan mounted in the roof of the stairtower, to
a duct system that delivers air to each level.

You must pressurize a stairtower enough to keep smoke out. However, if the pressure in the
stairtower is too great, then opening the doors leading into the stairtower can be difficult.
(See the figure below.)

Too Much Pressure Too Little Pressure

Building Building

Stairtower Stairtower

Figure 1-4. The Effects of Too Much or Too Little Pressure

1-13
Designing a Dedicated Smoke Control System, Continued

Designing the Ideal The ideal stairtower smoke control system must pressurize the stairway enough to keep the smoke
Stairtower System out, but it must not pressurize it so much that the doors cannot be opened. An example of a
dedicated smoke control system for a stairtower is shown in the figure below.

Exhaust Fan

Air Supply Duct

Air Flow

Fire Rated
Doors
Pressure Vents

Air Flow

Supply Fan

Figure 1-5. Stairtower Pressurization by Multiple Injections

The figure above shows stairtower pressurization by multiple injections with a supply fan located
at ground level and an exhaust fan located on the building roof.

Ensuring Doors The table below shows the maximum allowable pressure differential across a door in inches water
Can Open gauge (in.) based on how wide the door is and how much force the automatic door closing
mechanism exerts as defined in NFPA 92A. At the pressures shown in the table, the door requires 30
lbf (pounds of force) to open, the maximum limit suggested by the NFPA Life Safety Code (NFPA
101).
Table 1-2. Pressure Differential For Various Door Widths
.
Door Closer Pressure Differential
Force (lbf) 32 in. 36 in. 40 in. 44 in. 48 in.
6 0.45 0.40 0.37 0.34 0.31
8 0.41 0.37 0.34 0.31 0.28
10 0.37 0.34 0.30 0.28 0.26
12 0.34 0.30 0.27 0.25 0.23
14 0.30 0.27 0.24 0.22 0.21

Continued on next page

1-14
Designing a Dedicated Smoke Control System, Continued

Ensuring Doors Table 1-2 assumes a door height of seven feet and a distance from the doorknob to the knob side
Can Open of the door of three inches. If your door does not meet these requirements, or has opening
hardware other than a doorknob, such as panic hardware, then refer to the ASHRAE publication
Design of Smoke Control Systems for Buildings for a formula to calculate the proper opening
force. The door widths in Table 1-2 are only valid for doors that are hinged at one end. For other
types of doors, see the ASHRAE document.

Many door closers vary the amount of force as the door opens. They provide less resistance in the
early stages of opening the door than they do later, when the door is almost fully open. The force
to open the door shown in Table 1-2 represents the force needed to open the door only enough to
let air flow through the opening. Once air is able to flow, the force exerted by the difference in air
pressure on the door lessens. Therefore, when calculating the force required to open the door, you
may need to lower the door closer force.

Controlling Pressure Stairtower smoke control systems are divided into two categories: “non-compensated” and
in a Stairtower “compensated.” These categories are illustrated in the figure below, which shows stairtower
pressurization by top injection. Non-compensated systems simply turn on a fan to pressurize the
stairtower, as shown below in Stairtower A. The fan speed does not change to compensate for
doors opening and closing. The more doors that are open, the more the pressure differential
between the stairtower and the building drops.
Constant Variable
Fan Speed Fan Speed

Vent

Stairtower A Stairtower B

Figure 1-6. Non-Compensated and Compensated Stairtower Systems

Continued on next page

1-15
Designing a Dedicated Smoke Control System, Continued

Controlling Pressure The building shown in Figure 1-6, Stairtower A has no vent to the outside. Compensated systems
in a Stairtower adjust the airflow to make up for pressure lost through open doors. A compensated system
(Figure 1-6, Stairtower B) can use dampers (or vents) to relieve excess pressure in the stairtower
to ensure that the pressure does not go over the maximum limit.

There are a number of ways compensated stairtower smoke control systems can control
pressurization. In a basic system with a roof-mounted fan blowing air into the stairtower, pressure
can be regulated by varying the speed of the fan, the pitch of the fan blade, the inlet vanes, or the
number of fans operating (assuming there is more than one).

More sophisticated systems use ducts to deliver air to several points in the stairtower. The
dampers can be controlled to maintain the appropriate pressure in their zone. Duct systems can
also use bypass dampers and ducts to control the amount of air flowing from the fan to the outlets.
The bypass dampers are opened when the stairtower is at the proper pressure, so that excess air
flows into the bypass duct, then back to the air inlet not into the duct system.
The figure below shows a stairtower pressurization system that uses multiple pressure injection
dampers mounted in an air pressure duct. In this example, the vents to the building have
barometric dampers. While a roof-mounted fan is shown in the figure, the fan can be located at
any level. A manually-operated damper may be located at the top of the stairtower to aid the fire
department in purging smoke from the building during a fire.

Pressurization Fan

Air Pressure Duct

Dampers

Figure 1-7. Stairtower Pressurization by Multiple Injections (Roof-Mounted Fan)

Continued on next page

1-16
Designing a Dedicated Smoke Control System, Continued

Controlling Pressure The figure below shows a bypass pressure control system for stairtower pressurization with the
in a Stairtower bypass-around supply fan located at ground level. Although a ground-level fan is shown, the fan
can actually be placed at any level. The bypass duct dampers are controlled by one or more static
pressure sensors located between the stairtower and the building. In addition, a manually-operated
damper may be located at the top of the stairtower for smoke purging by the fire department.

Bypass Duct Dampers

Bypass Duct

Air Intake

Figure 1-8. A Bypass Pressure Control System

There are several ways for a compensated stairtower smoke control system to get rid of excess air
pressure to ensure that the stairtower doors can open properly. One or more vents to the building
exterior (with dampers) can be used in the stairtower to release excess pressure. These dampers
can be barometrically controlled (being forced open by the excess air pressure) or controlled by
electric motors or pneumatics as in conventional HVAC systems. In both cases, the dampers must
be placed far enough away from the air supply to prevent venting of air that has not yet been able
to disperse through the stairtower. Vents can also lead into the building, but you should consider
carefully the impact of venting extra pressure into the building before using this type of vent.

You can also use an exhaust fan to vent the excess pressure from the stairtower. Such a fan should
be designed to operate only when the stairtower is over-pressurized. It should never be on when
the pressure differential between the building and the stairtower is below the lowest limit.

1-17
Designing a Dedicated Smoke Control System, Continued

Elevator Smoke Most elevators do not have smoke protection, fire protection, or other features necessary for them
Control to be considered as a means for fire evacuation. Elevator systems not specifically designed and
built for fire evacuation should not be used in fire situations.
The elevator smoke control system is intended to prevent smoke flow to other floors by way of the
elevator shaft. Elevator shafts present a special menace with regards to smoke control. An elevator
shaft makes a perfect chimney to draw smoke into the upper levels of a building. Since elevators
usually have openings on each floor, and the seals on the elevator doors are often poor, the
elevator shaft can become a mechanism to spread smoke throughout a building. Smoke control in
an elevator shaft is an important consideration in the overall smoke control plan.
The problems resulting from smoke migration through elevator shafts are illustrated by the
MGM Grand Hotel fire. Although the fire occurred on the ground floor, the smoke from that fire
migrated through the elevator shafts to the upper floors resulting in a number of fatalities.
An obvious solution to this problem is to pressurize the elevator shafts, as shown in the figure
below. However, pressurizing an elevator shaft presents a number of problems. While the elevator
doors can be fitted with improved seals and rubber sweeps, these systems will not totally eliminate
air leakage. Also, most elevator shafts are not designed to be pressurized. They often have large
openings at the top where the cables feed into the winding room. Shafts are often constructed of
porous material that cannot contain the air pressure. And since most shafts are not designed to be
inspected after the elevators are installed, finding and repairing cracks that would let smoke
infiltrate or pressure escape is difficult.
Special Smoke-Proof
Elevator Doors

Elevator

Low Pressure
Smoke Area Created by
Elevator Door

Figure 1-9. Pressurizing an Elevator Shaft to Prevent Smoke Migration

Even if the shaft is pressurized, another primary problem is caused by the transient pressures
produced when an elevator car moves inside the shaft during a smoke emergency. This “piston
effect” can pull smoke into a normally pressurized elevator lobby or elevator shaft. For example,
an elevator car moving down from the top of the shaft may create a small low air pressure zone
near the top of the shaft, which can pull smoke from the fire zone into the shaft.
At the present time, these issues have not been resolved. Pressurizing the elevator shafts so that
the elevators can operate during a smoke emergency is still being studied.

IMPORTANT: In general, elevators should not be used as an escape route during


an evacuation.

1-18
Detecting Smoke

Introduction The fire detection system is the system that is connected to the smoke or heat detectors. Every
smoke zone should have a Listed smoke or heat detector installed in it. The detectors should be
located so that they can detect the presence of smoke or fire before it spreads beyond the zone.
Once the fire control system detects the fire, it relays to the smoke control system the zone and the
type of alarm that was triggered. The smoke control system then takes action.
Never use manual pull stations to initiate specific zoned smoke control. There is no guarantee that
the person pulling the alarm is in the same smoke zone as the fire. The automatic smoke control
system should take only those actions that are common to all smoke strategies when a manual pull
station is activated. For example, the stairtower can be pressurized in response to a manual pull
box alarm. Implementing a specific smoke control strategy must wait until the smoke detectors
locate the fire zone.

Configuring and The smoke control system should be able to act on its own in response to detecting smoke.
Monitoring a Smoke When it detects smoke, the system enacts the planned strategy of the designer. The automatic
Control System smoke control should maintain the strategy to control smoke in the first zone that smoke is
detected in. It would be difficult for you to create strategies for controlling smoke in all possible
combination of zones.
The automatic smoke control system must have the highest priority over all other automatic
control systems in the building. It must override energy management, occupancy schedules, or
other controls. The only systems that should be able to automatically override the smoke control
system are such safety systems as high pressure limiters.
Considering how unpredictable smoke is, you must have a manual control panel from which the
smoke control system can be monitored and overridden. This panel, called a “Firefighter's Smoke
Control Station” (FSCS), allows fire-fighting personnel to take manual control of the smoke
control system.

Firefighter Smoke The FSCS is a graphic annunciating control panel or computer workstation that gives firefighters
Control Station information about the state of the smoke control system, as well as manual control over all of its
(FSCS) components. The FSCS should be located in a secure room or cabinet to prevent unauthorized
personnel from tampering with it. When a TrueSite Workstation (TSW) with a single monitor is
used as the FSCS it must be located adjacent to the 4100U/ES panel that is providing the smoke
control functionality. The room or cabinet should be clearly marked so that firefighters can
quickly locate the FSCS.
The FSCS provides a diagram of the building showing the smoke control system, along with status
indicators and override functions for all of the system components. The diagram of the building
should include all smoke control zones, all of the ducts leading to and from the zones with arrows
indicating the direction of air flow in the ducts, and a clear indication of which zone each piece of
equipment serves.

The panel or computer workstation must have controls to activate all fans, dampers, and other
equipment related to the smoke control system. These manual controls must be able to override all
automatic control of smoke control equipment. In particular, the FSCS must be able to override:

 Hand/off/auto switches.
 Local start/stop switches on fan motor controllers.
 Freeze detection devices.
 Duct smoke detectors.

Continued on next page

1-19
Detecting Smoke, Continued

Firefighter Smoke The FSCS must not override such safety controls as:
Control Station
(FSCS)  Fire suppression.
 Electrical overload protection.
 Personnel protection devices.
 Electrical disconnects as required by NFPA 70.
 Other controls in accordance with UL 864.
 Any fire/smoke damper thermal control as required by UL 33, Standard for Heat Responsive Links for
Fire Protection Service or UL 555S, Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control
Systems.
In non-dedicated systems, local motor controller hand/off/auto switches can remain in-circuit with the FSCS
panel. But, they can remain in-circuit only if the switches are in a locked room accessible only to authorized
personnel. Also, if such a switch is thrown, a trouble condition must sound in the building main control
center. The indicator lights on the FSCS provide information about the functioning of the system.
The following colors for example are used for FSCS indicators:
 Green - Fans, dampers, and other smoke control equipment in an "on" state.
 White - Fans, dampers, and other smoke control equipment in a "normal" state.
 Yellow or Amber - Fans, dampers, and other smoke control equipment in a fault or abnormal condition.
 Red - Dampers and other smoke control equipment in an "off" or "closed" state.

The FSCS gets information on the status of the smoke control system from monitor sensors on the equipment.
Each fan that has a capacity of over 2,000 cfm must be equipped with an airflow monitor. In air distribution
systems, a monitor sensor is required to detect airflow while the blade or the vane in a damper is monitored
for position. Smoke dampers should be fitted with end-range switches to indicate that they are either fully-
opened or fully-closed. A dedicated button that tests all the panel lights is provided on a control panel type
FSCS to assure the indicator lights are functional.
All of the status indicators on the FSCS represent the state of the equipment as determined by the monitor
sensors. A fault indicator comes on if the piece of equipment is not in the correct state based upon its
intended function and within its trouble indication time (60 seconds for a fan and a maximum 75 seconds for
a damper). If within that time the proof sensors do not report that the piece of equipment has responded to the
control system command, the FSCS indicates that the piece of equipment has failed.

Testing the System During the installation, you should perform “operational tests” that make sure the components and
subsystems of the smoke control system are installed correctly. After the installation is done, you must
perform “acceptance tests,” to prove that the smoke control system is capable of doing what it was designed
to do. The testing procedures are covered in a later chapter of this document.

Related The following is a list of additional documentation that may aid you in understanding and designing Smoke
Documentation Control Systems.

 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., UL 864, Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm
Systems.
 The National Fire Protection Association. NFPA 92A, Recommended Practices for Smoke
Control Systems.
 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).
Society of Fire Protection Engineers. Design of Smoke Management Systems.
 The National Fire Protection Association. NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., UL 555S, Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in
Smoke Control Systems.
 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., UL 555, Fire Dampers.

1-20
Chapter 2.
Smoke Control Design Parameters

Introduction This chapter presents the general design parameters for Simplex Smoke Control System
equipment.

In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.

Topic See Page #


System Requirements 2-2
System Design Parameters 2-3

2-1
System Requirements

General The Simplex Smoke Control System has the following general requirements:
Requirements
 A smoke control system is a complete system engineered for a particular installation.
 Electrical supervision is required up to the input of the trunk-connected devices involved with
the electrical sensing and control of HVAC devices.
 The interconnection of the smoke control equipment to the HVAC equipment, and to other
system equipment, is intended to be in accordance with a specific installation diagram that is
generated by either the smoke control equipment manufacturer or by another responsible
party.

Agency Equipment for Smoke Control Systems is to be listed to Underwriters Laboratories category
Requirements UUKL per the requirement of UL 864, Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems.
Additionally, system equipment must be in accordance with locally adopted codes such as
NFPA 92A and the pertinent building codes.
Some of the smoke control considerations are as follows:
 Standby Power - Standby power for Simplex Smoke Control System Equipment is optional,
however if the equipment also provides fire alarm service then standby power would be
required.
 Smoke Control Actuating Input Circuits - The circuits which connect to devices which
initiate automatic smoke control must consist of one of the following:
- A supervised fire alarm initiating circuit of a Fire Alarm Control Unit which is also
providing smoke control.
- A supervised circuit connected to a zone output of a UL Listed Fire Alarm Control Unit.
- An unsupervised circuit connected to a zone output of a Listed Fire Alarm Control Unit
with each unit mounted adjacent (within twenty feet) to the other and the interconnecting
wiring run in conduit.
 Firefighter’s Smoke Control Station - Each system must also provide a Firefighter’s Smoke
Control Station (FSCS) as defined in NFPA 92A. The FSCS provides a complete and easily
understood system status, with provisions for manually overriding any smoke control process.
The contents of this document are derived from Standard NFPA 92A Recommended Practice for
Smoke-Control Systems. Additional construction and reliability concerns, not covered in
NFPA 92A, are derived from similar requirements governing Fire Alarm Control Units as found in
UL Standard 864. Detailed engineering design information is contained in the ASHRAE
publication, Design of Smoke Management Systems.

2-2
System Design Parameters

Verifying System The means for verifying system integrity during a non-emergency condition varies depending on
Integrity During whether the smoke control system is a “dedicated” or a “non-dedicated” system.
Non-Emergency
Conditions
 Dedicated Smoke Control Components: Solely used for smoke control functions and are
not operated in a non-emergency condition. Dedicated system equipment is therefore required
to incorporate an automatic weekly self-test of each smoke control function.
 Non-dedicated Smoke Control Components: HVAC components within a building which
are operated regularly. The normal “comfort” level associated with the proper operation of the
equipment serves as the means of maintaining system integrity.

Weekly Self-Test The weekly self-test consists of the smoke control system automatically commanding the
associated function to operate and expecting, within a specified time, that the associated proof
sensor will operate. A valid proof sensor operation does not have to be annunciated. However, the
lack of an expected proof sensor operation should produce an audible trouble signal and indicate
the specific device which did not operate.

Verifying System Smoke control system equipment must verify that a fan or damper has achieved its required end
Integrity During function during emergency conditions. This end-process verification consists of monitoring fans
Emergency by vane or pressure differential switches, and dampers by degree-of-opening switches. These
Conditions
monitored switches are further connected back to an input monitoring circuit of the Smoke
Control System Equipment, programmed to expect a signal within a specified time after an
automatic or manual activation. Annunciation of the end-process verifies that the process operates
as intended; if the proof sensors fail to operate, an audible trouble signal is sounded.

Automatic Where equipment used for smoke control is also used for normal building operation, control of
Activation this equipment must be preempted or overridden as required for smoke control. Automatic
activation of systems and equipment for zoned smoke control must have the highest priority over
all other sources of automatic control within the building. This equipment includes air
supply/return fans and dampers subject to automatic control according to building occupancy
schedules, energy management, or other purposes. The following controls should not be
automatically overridden:

 Static pressure high limits.


 Duct smoke detectors on supply air systems.

2-3
System Design Parameters, Continued

Subsequent Once an automatic activation has occurred, subsequent alarm signals that would normally result in
Automatic the automatic actuation of a smoke control strategy shall be annunciated only. No fans or dampers
Activation should be actuated in response to any subsequent automatic fire alarm signal in order to avoid the
possibility of defeating any smoke control strategies that are in process.

Automatic Activation of the smoke control system should be by smoke detectors and any other automatic
Activation by a devices located within the zone covered by the specific air conditioning and ventilating system.
Manual Pull Box Manual fire alarm pull boxes should not be used to initiate specific zoned smoke control
strategies because such a pull box in an adjacent smoke zone may be pulled, thereby placing the
system in an incorrect mode.

Manual Operation It is desirable that the smoke control system be independently controlled from a smoke control
center which should have controls capable of overriding all other HVAC systems. A manual
command is capable of overriding either fully or partially any automatic activation that may be in
process. This is based on the assumption that any manual activation is performed by authorized
personnel in response to a known emergency condition.

Automatic Override Since smoke control operation must override any programmed HVAC function, it is considered
of Manual Activation acceptable for the “Initial Automatic Activation” to override any manual control, initiated by any
other operator terminal other than the FSCS, which is currently in place.

NFPA Standard 92A requires that manual control initiated by the FSCS take precedence over
automatic control. Therefore, the smoke control system automatic programmed functions do not
override a manual FSCS control when a smoke control operation is initiated.

Example: When a control action at the FSCS is operated, the event is activated or deactivated
at a priority higher than the automatic smoke control program or any other operator
terminal priority. This prevents the automatic smoke control program or manual
commands from other operator terminals from overriding commands initiated at the
FSCS.

TSW FSCS Building The 19" monitor (4190-7130, 4190-7230, or 4190-7232) can be used for a building with a
Size maximum of 12 floors.

The 42" monitor (4190-7114 or 4190-7214) in landscape (horizontal) mode can be used for a
building with a maximum of 30 floors.

The 42" monitor (4190-7114 or 4190-7214) in portrait (vertical) mode can be used for a building
with a maximum of 50 floors.

2-4
Chapter 3.
Smoke Control System Components

Introduction This chapter presents a general overview of the Simplex Smoke Control System. It describes the
UL-listed components used, the features of each component, and the role of these components
within the system.

In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.

Topic See Page #


Smoke Control System – Wall-Mounted Graphic FSCS 3-2
Smoke Control System – TSW Type FSCS 3-3
4100U/4100ES/4010ES Panels 3-4
4190 TrueSite Workstation System and 24 Point I/O Graphic Interface 3-5
Optional and Peripheral System Components 3-6
Firefighter Smoke Control Station 3-7

3-1
Smoke Control System – Wall-Mounted Graphic FSCS

Smoke Control A smoke control system with a wall-mounted graphic FSCS is shown below:
System – Wall-
Mounted Graphic
FSCS

Figure 3-1a. Typical Network Smoke Control System with Graphic FSCS

The following major components are used in the Simplex Smoke Control System:

 4100U/4100ES/4010ES Control Panels (used as the system controller).


 4190 TrueSite Workstation System (TSW).
 Firefighter’s Smoke Control Station (FSCS).
These components are described in the following sections.

3-2
Smoke Control System – TSW Type FSCS

Smoke Control A smoke control system with a TSW type FSCS is shown below:
System – TSW
Type FSCS

/FSCS

Figure 3-1b. Typical Network Smoke Control System with TSW as FSCS

3-3
4100U/4100ES/4010ES Panels

FD4-465-02
4100U/4100ES/
4010ES Panels The 4100U, 4100ES or 4010ES panel serves as the system controller for the Simplex Smoke
Control System. It controls the communications between the other system components within the
smoke control system. This panel can be used in a dedicated or a non-dedicated smoke control
application. The 4100U, 4100ES and 4010ES connect to other panels in the following ways:
 The panel can connect to other Simplex Fire Alarm Control Panels and the FSCS computer
workstation via network communications.
 The panel can also connect to the graphic panel type FSCS using Remote Unit Interface (RUI)
AB C D EF GHI
ZONE SIG AUX

SYSTEM IS NORMAL 1 2 3
08:23:43 am MON 11-DEC-00 JKL
FB
MN O
IO
PQR
IDNet

ALARMS SYSTEM WARNINGS AC Power


4 5 6
Fire Alarm Priority 2 Alarm Supervisory Trouble Alarm Silenced STU VWX YZ/
P A L
7 8 9
'SP' ( ) ,0 :
Fire Alarm Priority 2 Supv Trouble Alarm System
NET ADDR
Ack Ack Ack Ack Silence Reset
0 DEL

Event More Enter C/Exit


Time Info Previous

Menu
On

serial supervised communications channel connections.


Enable Next
Arm

Off Lamp
Disable Auto
Disarm Test

Emergency Operating Instructions


Alarm or Warning Condition How to Silence Building Signals
System indicator flashing. Tone On. Press Alarm Silence.

How to Acknowledge / View Events How to Reset System


Press ACK located under flashing indicator. Press System Reset.
Repeat operation until all events are acknowledged. Press Ack to silence tone device.
Local tone will silence.

The Master Controller provides system control, synchronization, and supervision of all modules,
continuously scanning each module for status changes. Features include:
 Operator Panel with LCD and operator keys.
 Battery Charger for up to 110 Ah Batteries.
– Batteries up to 50 Ah may be mounted in the bottom of the control cabinet
Fire Control
– Batteries larger than 50 Ah mount external to main control cabinet
 Compatible with Lead Acid or NiCad Batteries
 System Power Supply (SPS), Power Limited. For 4010ES the SPS is replaced with the Main
System Slave (MSS):
 Supplies 9 A of alarm current (8A for MSS) and 5 A of standby current.
4100U/4100ES Panel  Three Class A (4 for MSS) or Class B NACs rated at 3 A each. Supports TrueAlert non-
addressable
A/V operation without synch cube.
 One 24 V auxiliary power tap, under software control.
 Charges 110 Ah batteries per UL 864; 50 Ah batteries per ULC S527.
 LCD readout of system voltage and current, battery voltage and current, and NAC current.
 Integral 250 point IDNet™ channel.
 AC input is 4A @ 120 VAC, 60 Hz; 2A @ 220/230/240 VAC, 60 Hz.
 Includes one relay, DPDT, 2A @ 32 VDC
 Landing point and control interface for optional two circuit City Card or three circuit
Relay Card. City Card is Reverse Polarity or Local Energy, configurable for alarm,
trouble, and supervisory.
General Operating Specifications
 Humidity: Up to 93% RH, Non-Condensing @ 90° F (32° C) Maximum
4010ES Panel
 Temperature: 32° F to 120° F (0° C to 49° C)

3-4
4190 TrueSite Workstation System and 24 Point I/O Graphic Interface

4190 TrueSite The 4190 TrueSite Workstation (TSW) provides a graphical user workstation within the Simplex
Workstation (TSW) Smoke Control System. You can interact with the smoke control system by entering input through
(Non-FSCS) a keyboard, mouse, or touch-screen.
Note 1: If a TSW is used in the system, a Firefighter’s Smoke Control Station must be provided
and this station must initiate smoke control commands at the highest priority.
Note 2: If the 4190 TSW is to be used as the Firefighter’s Smoke Control Station, then see
section “TrueSite Workstation (TSW) as an FSCS”.
Graphic Screens:
TSW graphic screens can provide easily recognizable site plan and floor plan information. The level
of detail can be customized for the specific facility to easily and accurately direct the operator to the
immediate area of interest.
Icons can be optionally added to identify the exact device of interest and the operator can utilize
TSW Pan and Zoom capabilities to move to a specific screen location for more detail.
When a system status change occurs, the screen displays the type and location of the activity.
The operator then touches the appropriate screen area (or uses the mouse control) to access a more
detailed view of the zone or device.

4190 TrueSite
Workstation TSW

Figure 3-2. TSW Screen Showing VESDA Information

24-Point I/O Graphic The 24-Point I/O Graphic Interface (4100-7401) is used for cabinet mounted graphic panels used
Interface (4100-7401) for the FSCS and has the following features:
 Each of the 24 points can be individually configured as either an input (e.g., switch) or output
(e.g., lamp or relay).
 150 mA output (+24 VDC supervised for LED, incandescent, or relay operation).
 Outputs can be steady, slow pulse, or fast pulse.
 Switch inputs can monitor two position or three position switches.
 Lamp test input.
 Provides supervised monitoring and/or control for smoke control applications.

3-5
Optional and Peripheral System Components

Optional System The following components may also be used in the Simplex Smoke Control System:
Components
 Network Display Unit (NDU).
 4010 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP).
 LCD Annunciator.
Note: The designated FSCS must initiate smoke control commands at the highest priority.
The figure below shows these optional components. The 4100U panel is used as an example:

FIRE PRIORITY 2 SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER ALARM


4603-9101 LCD
DISPLAY
ALARM

ALARM
ACK
ALARM

ALARM
ACK
SUPERVISORY TROUBLE

SUPV
ACK
TBL
ACK
ON SILENCED

ALARM
SILENCE
TIME

SYSTEM
RESET
Annunciator

ABC D EF GHI
ZONE SIG AUX

SYSTEM IS NORMAL 1 2 3
Fire Alarm Local Mode Controller
08:23:43 am MON 11-DEC-00 JK L
FB
MN O
IO
PQR
IDNet

ALARMS SYSTEM WARNINGS AC Power


4 5 6

4601 Series Transponder


Fire Alarm Priority 2 Alarm Supervisory Trouble Alarm Silenced STU V WX YZ/ Alarm
P A L
7 8 9
Local
'SP' ( ) ,0 : Mode
Fire Alarm Priority 2 Supv Trouble Alarm System
NET ADDR
Control Alarm
Ack Ack Ack Ack Silence Reset
0 DEL CONTROL Silenced
ENABLE
Event More Enter C/Exit Local
Time

Enable

Disable
On
Arm

Off
Disarm
Auto
Info

Lamp
Test
Menu
Previous

Next Alarm
Silence Reset
Mode
Active

Power
On
Local Mode Controller
Emergency Operating Instructions See Operating Instruction 579-343
Alarm or Warning Condition How to Silence Building Signals
System indicator flashing. Tone On. Press Alarm Silence.

How to Acknowledge / View Events How to Reset System


Press ACK located under flashing indicator. Press System Reset.
Repeat operation until all events are acknowledged. Press Ack to silence tone device.
Local tone will silence.

DISCONNECT
A.C. POWER
AND N
C BATTERY
BEFORE
SERVICING O
A
I
U
T
T
U
I
A
O SERVICING
BEFORE
On On C
N
BATTERY
AND
A.C. POWER
Off Off DISCONNECT

Auto Auto

On On

Off Off

Auto Auto

On On

Off Off

Auto Auto

On On

Off Off

Auto Auto

Fire Control

4100U Fire Alarm Control Panel or


4100U MINIPLEX
Network Display Unit (NDU) with Voice
Transponder Cabinet
Modules and LED/Switch Modules
Figure 3-3. Optional Smoke Control System Components

Peripheral In addition to the components previously described, a Simplex Smoke Control System also
Components contains one or more of the following addressable or conventional components:
 Smoke Detection Device
 Duct Smoke Detection Relay
 Individual Addressable Module (IAM, Single or Multi-point)
 Zone Addressable Module (ZAM, Monitor or Control)
 System Accessories (Printer, PC Annunciator, etc.)

3-6
Firefighter Smoke Control Station

Wall-Mounted The figure below shows a view of a typical wall-mounted graphic Firefighter’s Smoke Control
Graphic Firefighter Station (FSCS) used with the Simplex Smoke Control System. FSCS panels are custom designed
Smoke Control for each building. See the “FSCS Ordering Information” section later in this chapter.
Station (FSCS)
FigureTag FD4-465-02

FIREFIGHTER’S SMOKE CONTROL STATION


OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER EXHAUST AIR DAMPER

G A Y G A Y
OPEN FAIL CLOSED OPEN FAIL CLOSED

SUPPLY DUCT CLOSED CLOSED


OPEN OPEN
SMOKE DETECTOR
AUTO AUTO

SUPPLY FAN RETURN AIR DAMPER EXHAUST FAN

G A G A Y G A
ON FAIL OPEN FAIL CLOSED ON FAIL

ON OFF OPEN CLOSED ON OFF


AUTO AUTO AUTO

TOP OF
STAIR ALARM
R

SUPPLY AIR DAMPER EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER

G A Y 4TH FLOOR G A Y
OPEN FAIL CLOSED R OPEN FAIL CLOSED

OPEN CLOSED SMOKE ALARM OPEN CLOSED


AUTO AUTO

SUPPLY AIR DAMPER EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER

G A Y 3RD FLOOR G A Y
OPEN FAIL OPEN FAIL CLOSED
CLOSED R
OPEN CLOSED SMOKE ALARM OPEN CLOSED
AUTO AUTO

SUPPLY AIR DAMPER EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER

G A Y 2ND FLOOR G A Y
OPEN FAIL CLOSED R OPEN FAIL CLOSED

CLOSED SMOKE ALARM OPEN CLOSED


OPEN
AUTO AUTO

SUPPLY AIR DAMPER EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER

G A Y 1ST FLOOR G A Y
FAIL CLOSED R OPEN FAIL CLOSED

SMOKE ALARM
CLOSED OPEN CLOSED
AUTO AUTO
SUPPLY DUCT
SMOKE DETECTOR
R

STAIR PRESSURIZATION FAN


AUDIBLE
MASTER
G A CLEAR
LAMP
ON FAIL

ON OFF KEY
TONE TEST FAULTS
AUTO

Figure 3-4. Firefighter’s Smoke Control Station

Continued on next page

3-7
Firefighter Smoke Control Station, Continued

Wall-Mounted The smoke control panel must work completely in conjunction with the fire alarm control panel.
Graphic Firefighter This is because the FSCS is used by firefighters to activate and deactivate all smoke control
Smoke Control sequences in the event that the fire spreads and for smoke cleanup operations. All switches
Station (FSCS)
override the automatic operation, in the event of a conflict with the operation. The FSCS must be
able to override any other manual or automatic control that is being used in the system, except
when those controls intended to protect against electrical overloads, provide for personal safety,
or prevent major system damage.

The design of the controls and status indications must be as simple as possible for firefighter use.
Smoke control schemes can sometimes incorporate the simultaneous use of multiple (sometimes
over a hundred) air handling units, exhaust fans, and dampers to accomplish the function.

The FSCS graphic must show all fans in excess of 2000 CFM, all dampers or groups of Variable
Air Volume (VAV) boxes, and all major ducts. The FSCS graphic must depict the direction of
airflow in the ducts. The air handling units, fans, and dampers must be grouped into “systems” or
“smoke zones.” These “smoke zones” are determined by the physical layout of the building and
the smoke and fire barriers as structurally and architecturally designed, for firefighting purposes.

It may be advantageous to provide one switch for each “system” or “smoke zone.” With the
appropriate units interlocked to manage smoke in the affected area, there could be potentially
hundreds of H-O-A switches. Fans require a three-position control that provides ON-AUTO-OFF
capabilities. Dampers require a three-position control that provides OPEN-AUTO-CLOSE
capabilities. The AUTO position can be removed if the piece of equipment can only be controlled
by the FSCS.

Smoke Management zones can be provided with a three-position switch, in addition to the
required switches, that provides PRESSURIZE-AUTO-EXHAUST capabilities. Status indications
are required for each system to positively indicate that a smoke control sequence has been
initiated. Fans must have a single green indicator that turns on when the fan proof sensor indicates
that the fan is running.

Dampers have three indicators:


 Yellow: Turns ON when the damper proof sensor confirms that the damper is closed
 Green: Turns ON when the damper proof sensor confirms that the damper is open
 Amber: Turns ON to indicate failure.
These indicators must be OFF when the damper is between the open and closed position.

The FSCS must have a Red indicator for each smoke control zone to signal if the zone is currently
in an alarm condition.

The FSCS must have Amber/Orange indicators to annunciate equipment faults from each piece of
equipment monitored by proof sensors. If fans do not indicate running within 60 seconds, or
dampers do not reach the required position within 75 seconds, a fault indication must be
annunciated on the FSCS.
Note: Confirm actual times with local codes.
The FSCS must have a “master key-switch” to prevent unauthorized personnel from issuing
commands. When the key is inserted and turned, all controls on the FSCS are enabled. Alternate
command control may be performed by being inside a locked enclosure or other access control
means that are accepted by local authority.
Continued on next page

3-8
Firefighter Smoke Control Station, Continued

Wall-Mounted The FSCS must have an audible signal that sounds when either a smoke control zone is in alarm or
Graphic Wall- to bring attention to a fault indicator. Operating the key-switch and then pressing the audible
Mounted Graphic silence button is the only method of silencing the FSCS audible signal.
Firefighter Smoke
Control Station The FSCS must have an “Audible Silence Button.” This momentary push-button is activated only
(FSCS) when the master key-switch is ON. This button is used to silence the FSCS audible signal that
activated as a result of proof sensors failing to report or annunciation of smoke detection within
the FSCS smoke control zones.
The FSCS must have a means to turn OFF equipment fault indicators that were activated as a
result of proof sensors failing to report within the required time period. If a “Clear Faults Button”
or similar means to clear faults, is used it would be active only when the master key-switch is ON.
An alternate means may be by logging in at an authorized level at the Fire Alarm Control Panel
and then clearing the faults.
The FSCS must have a “Lamp Test Button.” This momentary push-button is active at all times to
turn ON all indicators to allow for visual confirmation of failed indicator LEDs.

Note: Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of Simplex Field Wiring Diagrams and Interconnection
Diagrams that can assist you in installing the Simplex Smoke Control System.

FSCS Ordering A Firefighter’s Smoke Control Station (FSCS) consists of a site-specific, customized floor plan or
Information elevation graphic, illuminated status indicators, and switches. The FSCS uses Simplex LED
drivers and switch input modules (Models 4100-7401 through -7404 and 4602-7101) that
communicate with the 4100U/4100ES and 4010ES FACPs by means of a supervised RUI
communications channel. The Models 4100-7401 through -7404 and 4602-7101 have been found
suitable for use as components internal to a UL-Listed FSCS manufactured by others.
There are several suppliers of UL-listed FSCS. Below are references to two manufacturers known
to have UL Listed FSCS equipment utilizing Simplex LED drivers and switch modules when this
document was published. Since manufacturer's Listing compliance may change, always verify
smoke control system equipment listing compliance of the FSCS before placing your FSCS order.:
The H.R. Kirkland Company Inc. Space Age Electronics, Inc.
4935 Allison Street, Unit 13 406 Lincoln street
Arvada, CO. 80002 Marlboro, MA 01752-2195
1-303-422-6670 1-508-485-0966
1-800-247-2303 1-800-486-1723
Fax: 1-303-420-1856 Fax: 1-508-485-4740
www.hrkirkland.com www.1sae.com

To build an FSCS panel to your project specifications:


 Specify the size requirement of your FSCS.
 Coordinate the FSCS box requirements with the vendor.
 Provide an approved drawing of the desired FSCS graphic.
 Specify the type of Simplex graphic modules to be connected to the FSCS.

Note: Graphic vendors provide mating connectors for the graphic interface modules from a
Simplex controller.

3-9
Firefighter Smoke Control Station, Continued

The FACP connects to all of the smoke detectors, manual pull boxes, fire alarms, etc within the
About the FACP building. When one of the FACP sensors detects a problem, the FACP informs the smoke control
panel which sensor is in alarm condition and what the alarm condition is. The smoke control
system receives all alarm information from the FACP. However, the smoke control zones must
correspond to the zones of the FACP.
When multiple services are used with a TSW that is used for FSCS operation (Dual Monitor
Status Bar mode), refer to 579-835 4190 TrueSite Workstation Operation & Application Instructions for
Operation status bar functions.

Captive Mode When in Captive mode the workstation occupies the whole PC screen. No task bar is displayed,
the Windows task bar is hidden and Windows features cannot be accessed.

TrueSite There are two setup options when TSW is used as the FSCS:
Workstation (TSW)
as an FSCS 1. There is a single monitor with LED card in the FACP.
2. There are two monitors.

The smoke control panel must work completely in conjunction with the FACP. This is because the
FSCS is used by firefighters to activate and deactivate all smoke control sequences in the event
that the fire spreads and for smoke cleanup operations. In the event of a conflict all switches
override the automatic operation. The FSCS must be able to override any other manual or
automatic control in the system, except for controls intended to protect against electrical
overloads, provide for personal safety, or prevent major system damage.
The design of the controls and status indications must be as simple as possible. Smoke control
schemes can incorporate the simultaneous use of multiple (sometimes over a hundred) air handling
units, exhaust fans and dampers. The FSCS graphic must show all fans in excess of 2000 CFM, all
dampers or groups of Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes, and all major ducts. The FSCS graphic
must depict the direction of airflow in the ducts. The air handling units, fans, and dampers must be
grouped into “systems” or “smoke zones.” These “smoke zones” are determined by the physical
layout of the building and the smoke and fire barriers as structurally and architecturally designed
for firefighting purposes.
“Smoke zones” can be supplied with PRESSURIZE, AUTO and EXHAUST control icons. Status
indications are required for each system to indicate that a smoke control sequence has been
initiated.
Fans must have a single green indicator that turns on when the fan proof sensor indicates that the
fan is running.
Dampers have three indicators:
 Yellow: Turns ON when the damper proof sensor indicates that the damper is closed.
 Green: Turns ON when the damper proof sensor indicates that the damper is open.
 Amber: Turns ON to indicate damper failure.
Note: The damper indicators must be OFF when the damper is between the open and closed
position.
The FSCS must have a Red indicator for each “smoke zone” to signal when the zone is in alarm.
The FSCS must have an Amber/Orange indicator for each piece of equipment monitored by proof
sensors to indicate faults. If fans are not running within 60 seconds or dampers do not reach the
required position within 75 seconds, a fault indication must be annunciated on the FSCS.
Note: Confirm time frames with local codes.
Continued on next page

3-10
Firefighter Smoke Control Station, Continued

TrueSite
The FSCS must be password-protected. When access has been granted, all controls on the FSCS
Workstation (TSW) are enabled. Alternate command control may be performed by being inside a locked enclosure or
as an FSCS other access control means accepted by local authority.
The FSCS must have an audible signal that sounds when either a “smoke zone” is in alarm or
when a fault indicator is on.

Operation of the Audible and Silence is described in sections “FSCS Setup for Single Monitor”
and “FSCS/TSW Setup for Dual Monitors” for the single-monitor and two-monitor style systems.
The Lamp Test Icon jumps to a screen that 'paints' the screen in a solid color. This allows the
operator to view the pixels of the screen.
Note: Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of Simplex Field Wiring Diagrams and Interconnection
Diagrams that can assist you in installing the Simplex Smoke Control System.

FSCS Setup for In Single Monitor, touch screen or non-touch screen monitors may be employed. The TSW is
Single Monitor dedicated to Smoke Management and access is controlled by password protection. The 4100ES
mounts in close proximity to TSW. TSW must be located in a limited access/non-public area
adjacent to the 4100U/ES that is still readily accessible to the firefighting personnel.
The Fire, Pri2, Supervisory and Trouble status icons are visible on the Status Bar. When an
appropriate signal is received, the status icons flash and the sounder is activated. The
unacknowledged points and icons are displayed in a steady ON state once acknowledged. The
TSW is not allowed to acknowledge any points or display any Alarm List. This must be done
through the adjacent 4100ES. The only visible options allowed are Graphics and Login. When a
graphic screen is selected during setup, only the Home screen, Pan, and Zoom features are
available to the user. When logged-in at the appropriate access level, the user can control the fans,
dampers and other smoke control equipment required for Smoke Management.
The `HOME' screen which shows the basic location layout is fixed. For improved clarity and
Control/Indications, the screen features of the Pan and Zoom functionality are available. These
screens indicate the position/status of the fans, dampers and other smoke control equipment as
well as having the control buttons (Icons) present.
The 4100ES also has Led Modules which indicate which Smoke Management devices are in
trouble. This enables the user to see all fans, dampers and other smoke control equipment troubles
at one time.
The Auto Jump function in the TSW is used to jump to the 'Home' screen whenever there is an
Alarm or Trouble that effects the FSCS operation. An Alarm or Trouble indicator is displayed in
the general area. It is flashing for unacknowledged points and on steady when the point is
acknowledged. From this Home screen the operator can easily navigate to the area of Alarm or
Trouble for more detail. If other Fire Alarms or Troubles in the Smoke Management system are
initiated the system jumps to the Home screen so that the user can see what is happening and can
determine what to view. (Fire Alarm has a higher priority than trouble. Therefore if there is a Fire
Alarm, and a trouble comes in, the system does not jump to the Home screen.)
The TSW (FSCS) is set up for Captive Environment, so that no other application can run.
See Chapter 6 ”Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming” for the full setup procedure.

3-11
Firefighter Smoke Control Station, Continued

FSCS/TSW Setup for When dual monitors, touch or non-touch screens, are used, one monitor is dedicated to the FSCS
Dual Monitors graphics only. The TSW is located in a limited access/non-public area that is still readily
accessible to firefighting personnel.
This is accomplished by using access levels to prohibit other information from being displayed on
the FSCS monitor. The other monitor can be used to perform the normal functions associated with
the TSW.
When multiple screens are part of the configuration for the TSW FSCS, a `HOME' screen shows
the basic layout of the premises. This screen displays Alarms or Troubles in the smoke zones.
For improved clarity and Control/Indications, other screens with Pan and Zoom functionality are
available. These screens indicate the position/status of the fans, dampers and other smoke control
equipment as well as having the control buttons (icons) present.
The Fire, Pri2, Supervisory and Trouble status icons are visible on each screen. They flash but
have no control function associated.
The Auto Jump function in the TSW is used to jump to the 'Home' screen. The graphics view
jumps to the Home screen whenever there is an Alarm or Trouble that affects the FSCS operation.
An Alarm or Trouble indicator is displayed in the general area. It is flashing for unacknowledged
points and on steady when the point is acknowledged. From this Home screen the operator can
easily navigate to the area of Alarm or Trouble for more detail. If other Alarms or Troubles in the
Smoke Management system are initiated the system jumps to the Home screen so that the user can
see what is happening and can determine what to view (Fire Alarm has a higher priority than
trouble. Therefore if there is a Fire Alarm and a Trouble comes in, the system does not jump to the
Home screen.)
The TSW (FSCS) is setup for Captive Environment, so that no other application can run.

See Chapter 6 ”Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming” for the setup procedure.

3-12
Chapter 4.
Installing the Smoke Control System

Introduction This chapter contains general guidelines for smoke control installations and interconnections.
Please refer to the applicable installation documents for component installation instructions. These
documents are shipped with the individual components.

All wiring in the Simplex Smoke Control System must comply with the National Electric Code
(NFPA 70), the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72), the appropriate Simplex Field Wiring
diagrams (refer to the “Field Wiring and Interconnection Diagrams” section of this chapter) and
any state or local requirements.

In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.

Topic See Page #


General Smoke Control Interconnections 4-2
Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring 4-6
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring Diagrams 4-10

4-1
General Smoke Control Interconnections

Overview A Simplex Smoke Control System is usually part of a larger Simplex Fire Alarm System. The
Simplex Smoke Control System ties into the building air handling equipment, either dedicated,
non-dedicated, or both, to form the overall Smoke Management system for the building.

Since Simplex equipment is not the primary control equipment for a building's non-dedicated air
handling equipment, the interconnection between the Simplex Smoke Control System and the
non-dedicated air handling equipment is critical. This interconnection must be done in such a
manner to guarantee that the Smoke Control System takes priority, and that Smoke Control
System commands cannot be overridden by other building systems.

Although every application is different, the sections that follow describe some typical methods for
interconnecting to air handling elements to insure that Smoke Control System commands take
precedence and that accurate monitoring of the air handling system is fed back into the Smoke
Control System. Fan and damper control are shown in some detail to illustrate principles that can
be extrapolated to other more special purpose applications. These principles should be generally
applied to the detailed design of specific engineered smoke control solutions.

Smoke Control System operation is dependent both on the hardware and the control software.
The wiring diagrams shown in this chapter, must be used with appropriate programming to create
an operational control system.

4-2
General Smoke Control Interconnections, Continued

UUKL Addressable The following table lists the UUKL addressable monitor/control devices for the 4100U/4100ES
Monitor/Control Devices and 4010ES systems.
for 4100U, 4100ES and
4010ES Note: 4010ES does not support MAPNET II devices.
Table 4-1. UUKL Addressable Monitor/Control Device List for 4100U/4100ES and 4010ES

Model Description IDNet™ MAPNET II® See Doc #


Supervised IAM, single address, single point; IDNet and
4100U/4100ES and 4010ES provide “T” sense (current limited
4090-9001 574-331
monitoring); MAPNET II and 4100U/4100ES provide simple N.O.
Class B monitoring.
Relay IAM, single address, single point; Form “C” with relay status
4090-9002 –– 574-184
tracking.
4090-9101 Class B monitor ZAM.
574-183
4090-9106 Class A monitor ZAM.
Relay IAM with T sense input, single address, dual point, relay and
4090-9118* –– 574-874
input.
Relay IAM with unsupervised input, single address,
4090-9119* –– 574-875
dual point, relay and input.
4090-9120* Six point module; four T sense inputs, 2 relays; one address. –– 574-876
841-802
4100-7401 24 Point I/O Graphic Module. –– ––
S4100-0005
841-802
4100-7402 64/64 LED/Switch Controller. –– ––
S4100-0005
841-802
4100-7403 32 Point LED Module –– ––
S4100-0005
841-802
4100-7404 32 Point Switch Module. –– ––
S4100-0005
Graphic I/O, RCU/SCU (Remote Control Unit/Status Control Unit,
4602-7101 –– –– ––
selectable operation).

Table 4-2. MAPNET II UUKL Addressable Monitor/Control Device List for 4100U/4100ES
®
Model Description IDNet™ MAPNET II See Doc #
2190-9153 Class A Monitor ZAM, surface mount. ––
2190-9154 Class A Monitor ZAM, flush mount. ––
574-668
2190-9155 Class B Monitor ZAM, surface mount. ––
2190-9156 Class B Monitor ZAM, flush mount. ––
2190-9159 Class A Signal ZAM, surface mount. ––
2190-9160 Class A Signal ZAM, flush mount. ––
2190-9161 Class B Signal ZAM, surface mount. ––
575-279
2190-9162 Class B Signal ZAM, flush mount. ––
2190-9163 Control Relay ZAM, surface mount. ––
2190-9164 Control Relay ZAM, flush mount. ––
2-Point I/O Module supervised input and relay output;
2190-9173* –– 574-995
two sequential addresses.
* Devices designed specifically for Smoke Control Applications.
Note: These are common smoke control system components and do not include other commonly used fire detection
components such as pull stations, heat detectors, and initiation and notification appliances.

4-3
General Smoke Control Interconnections, Continued

Reference For wiring details on the devices shown in the following sections, refer to the following reference
Information information shown below:
 MAPNET II/IDNet Devices Field Wiring Diagram .......................... 841-804
 4020/4100 Graphic Annunciator Field Wiring Diagram ................. 841-802
 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Instructions ........................ 574-848
 4010ES Fire Alarm System Installation Instructions ........................ 579-989

4-4
General Smoke Control Interconnections, Continued

Four Story The figure below shows an application diagram for a four-story building. This figure illustrates
Building Smoke how the elements of the Smoke Control System are architecturally related, how they fit within the
Control Example overall Simplex Fire Alarm System, and how they relate to the building air handling systems.

Figure Legend Description


FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel (e.g., Models 4100U and 4010ES as described in Chapter 3).
FSCS Firefighter’s Smoke Control Station (as described in Chapter 3).
TSW TrueSite Workstation System (e.g., Model 4190 as described in Chapter 3).
C Relay IAM with Feedback (e.g., Model 4090-9118).
M Supervised IAM (e.g., Model 4090-9001).
D HVAC damper, supply or return (as described in Chapter 3).
DPS Damper position switch (as described in Chapter 3)
FAN Stairtower or elevator shaft pressurization fan.
S Other signaling line circuit devices (e.g., smoke detector, pull station, etc.)
ASW Air flow sensing switch (as described in Chapter 3).

Figure 4-1. Four-Story Building Smoke Control Example

4-5
Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring

Overview Dedicated Smoke Control System wiring is usually straightforward. The Smoke Control System is
the only source for commands to the fans and dampers, and therefore bypass and cut-off relays are
not needed. The following sections illustrate some examples of dedicated fan and damper control.

Dedicated Damper control is a basic function of the Simplex Smoke Control System. Interconnections to
Damper Control motorized dampers are shown in Figures 4-2 and 4-3.
The figure below shows dedicated motorized damper control using a 4090-9120 6-Point I/O
Module. Both relay outputs are used, one to control opening the damper and the other to control
closing it.
The wiring between the 6-Point I/O Module and the control relays is unsupervised, so the module
must be mounted within three feet of the relays/dampers in accordance with NFPA 72.
Note: The wiring to the limit switches is supervised and limited to 500 ft. (152 m).
+24V 1A @ 30 VDC
FROM or POWER
SOURCE
FACP 1/4 A @ 120 VAC

0V

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

LISTED
CONTROL
COMM RELAY
IDNet + N/O (N/O)

IDNet - COMM
N/O

LISTED
CONTROL
RELAY
(N/O)

OPEN POSITION
LIMIT SWITCH DAMPER
CLOSED
N/O POWER

DAMPER
COMM OPEN
POWER
SMOKE DAMPER
MOTOR

N/O

COMM

CLOSED POSITION RETURN


LIMIT SWITCH

6.8 K 1/2 W EOLR


(Per Installation Instructions, 574-876)

Figure 4-2. Dedicated Motorized Damper Control Using a 6-Point I/O Module

Continued on next page

4-6
Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring, Continued

Dedicated Dedicated damper control using the 4100-7401 24-Point I/O is similar to control using Relay
Damper Control IAMs and 6-Point I/O Modules, except that the 4100-7401 module is used for both control and
feedback. This module communicates with the 4100U/4100ES and 4010ES Master over the RUI
communications, and offers the added advantage that all I/O is supervised. The figure below
shows dedicated motorized damper control using the 4100-7401 24-Point I/O:

Figure 4-3. Dedicated Motorized Damper Control Using the 24-Point I/O Module

4-7
Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring, Continued

Dedicated Like smoke dampers, fan control is a basic function of the Simplex Smoke Control System.
Fan Control General principles for interconnection to a dedicated fan are shown in Figures 4-4 and 4-5.
In a dedicated fan control application, the 4090-9118 Relay IAM is used to provide inputs to a fan
to turn it ON and monitor the feedback from the controller. The wiring between the Relay IAM
and the fan is unsupervised, so the IAMs must be mounted within three feet of the controller in
accordance with NFPA 72.

1A @ 30 VDC
or
1/4 A @ 120 VAC

POWER
SOURCE

INPUT COMM

N/O

LISTED
RELAY
(N/O)

SERVICE
DISCONNECT

LISTED
SAIL
SWITCH
FAN
N/O COMM
IDNet SLC
FROM FACP

RETURN
6.8 K 1/2 W EOLR
(Per Installation Instructions 574-874)

Figure 4-4. Dedicated Fan Control Using a Relay IAM

Continued on next page

4-8
Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring, Continued

Dedicated Dedicated fan control using the 4100-7401 24-Point I/O is similar to control using Relay IAMs
Fan Control and 6-Point I/O Modules, except that the 4100-7401 module is used for both control and feedback.
This module communicates with the 4100U/4100ES and 401ES Master over the RUI
communications, and offers the added advantage that all I/O is supervised. The figure below
shows the equivalent interconnects for applications using a 24-Point I/O Module.

Figure 4-5. Dedicated Fan Control Using the 24-Point I/O Module

4-9
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring Diagrams

Overview Non-dedicated Smoke Control System wiring adds a layer of complexity, as the Smoke Control
System must take control of the fans and dampers from the HVAC system. This introduces the use
of bypass and cutoff relays not needed in a Dedicated Smoke Control System. The following
sections illustrate some examples of non-dedicated damper and fan control.

Non-Dedicated Damper control and overriding the HVAC control of the damper is a basic function of the Simplex
Damper Control Smoke Control System. Interconnections for dampers are shown in Figures 4-6 through 4-9.
Control of the damper is accomplished using the 4090-9118 Relay IAM. The Relay IAM
communicates with the FACP via the Simplex IDNet Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). When
commanded by the FACP the Relay IAM activates the smoke control override relay and supplies
power to the pressure switch to close the damper.

Continued on next page

4-10
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring Diagrams, Continued

Non-Dedicated Feedback of the closure is accomplished using a 4090-9120 6-Point I/O Module to monitor the
Damper Control closed position limit switch on the damper. The module also communicates with the Simplex
FACP via IDNet. Wiring from the module to the control relay is unsupervised, so it must be
mounted within three feet of the relay/damper in accordance with NFPA 72.
The figure below shows non-dedicated motorized damper control using the 6-Point I/O Module.
POWER
1A @ 30 VDC SOURCE
or
1/4 A @ 120 VAC

EMS

+24V
FROM
FACP
LISTED
0V RELAY
(A)
(N/O)

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

COMM LISTED
(B) RELAY
(N/C)
N/O

COMM

N/O LISTED
RELAY
(N/C)

IDNet SLC
FROM FACP

LISTED
RELAY
(N/O)

OPEN POSITION
LIMIT SWITCH

N/O

DAMPER
COMM OPEN
POWER DAMPER
CLOSED
SMOKE DAMPER
MOTOR

POWER

N/O

COMM
RETURN
CLOSED POSITION
LIMIT SWITCH
6.8 K 1/2 W EOLR
(Per Installation Instructions, 574-876)

Figure 4-6. Non-Dedicated Motorized Damper Control


The two relay circuits of the 6-Point I/O Module are used, one to control opening the damper and
the other to control closing it. Relays [A] and [B] are activated to close the damper. One output
circuit controls Relay [A] to override the Energy Management System (EMS) and provide power
to the motor to close the damper. Relay [B] insures that no open power is provided to the motor
from the EMS. The other output circuit works in exactly the opposite fashion to control the
opening of the damper. The damper position is monitored by the two supervised inputs of the
6-Point I/O Module.
The wiring between the 6-Point I/O Module output circuits and the relays is unsupervised, so the
6-Point I/O Module must be mounted within three feet of the relays/dampers in accordance with
NFPA 72. The wiring to the limit switches is supervised, so no such restriction exists with the
monitor circuits.

Continued on next page


4-11
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring Diagrams, Continued

Non-Dedicated The figure below shows non-dedicated motorized damper control using the 24-Point I/O Module.
Damper Control

Figure 4-7. Non-Dedicated Motorized Damper Control Using the 24-Point I/O Module

4-12
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring Diagrams, Continued

Non Dedicated Like smoke dampers, fan control and overriding the HVAC control is a basic function of the
Fan Control Simplex Smoke Control System. General principles for interconnection to a non-dedicated fan are
shown in Figures 4-8 and 4-9.
In a non-dedicated fan control application, a 4090-9120 6-Point I/O Module is used to provide
inputs to a fan controller for smoke control override and monitor the feedback from the controller.
The wiring between the module and the fan controller is unsupervised, so the module must be
mounted within three feet of the controller in accordance with NFPA 72.
1A @ 30 VDC
or
1/4 A @ 120 VAC

0V
+24V
POWER
FROM
SOURCE
FACP

INPUT 1 EMS

LISTED
RELAY
COMM (N/O)
N/O

COMM
N/O

LISTED
RELAY
IDNet SLC (N/C)
FROM FACP

SERVICE
DISCONNECT

LISTED
SAIL
SWITCH
FAN
N/O COMM

RETURN

6.8 K 1/2 W EOLR


(Per Installation Instructions, 574-876)

Figure 4-8. Non-Dedicated Fan Control Using a 6-Point I/O Module

Continued on next page

4-13
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring Diagrams, Continued

Non Dedicated Non-dedicated fan control using the 24-Point I/O is similar to control using a Relay IAM
Fan Control or 6-Point I/O Module, except that the 4100-7401 24-Point I/O Module is used for both control
and feedback. This module communicates with the 4100U/4100ES and 4010ES Master over the
RUI communications SLC, and offers the added advantage that all I/O is supervised, so no
restrictions on module placement are required. The figure below shows the equivalent
interconnects for applications using a 24-Point I/O.

Figure 4-9. Non-Dedicated Fan Control Using the 24-Point I/O Module

4-14
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control System Wiring Diagrams, Continued

TSW (FSCS) Figure 4-10 shows a 4100ES with LED modules for use with the TSW as an FSCS.
FigureTag FD4-465-03
4100ES

Monitor

Connection via
4120 Network
PC

4100ES located in close TSW used as FSCS


proximity with TSW

LED Switch Modules for


displaying Fan and Damper
troubles used for Smoke Control,
qty as required

Figure 4-10. 4100ES with LED Modules and TSW/FSCS

4-15
Chapter 5.
Smoke Control System Programs, Wall-Mounted
Graphics

Introduction This chapter provides examples of Simplex Smoke Control System programs. These programs are
presented to illustrate what can be accomplished with this system. Since every system is unique,
your programs will not be identical to these programs. Instead, use these programs as templates
when programming the system.

Keep in mind the following smoke control objectives when programming the system:

 Maintain safe fire-free and smoke-free routes to allow sufficient time for the occupants to exit
the premises or move to designated safe refuge areas.
 Provide a relatively clear approach to the fire area by firefighters so that the fire (the source of
the smoke) can be contained and extinguished as fast as possible.
 If designated safe refuge areas are a part of the life safety design, then the control system must
prevent smoke migration into such areas for a prolonged period of time.
 Reduce the amount of fire and smoke damage to the property.

In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.

Topic See Page #


Smoke Control Program Requirements 5-2
Dedicated Smoke Control System Weekly Self-Test 5-3
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations 5-5

5-1
Smoke Control Program Requirements

Introduction The following paragraphs describe the requirements for the various types of programs that can be
implemented using the Simplex Smoke Control System.

Emergency Emergency operation programs have the following functions:


Operation
 Zoned smoke control to activate from automatic devices only.
 Manual devices may cause any operation that is common to all smoke strategies
(e.g. Stairtower Pressurization).

Automatic Program Automatic operation programs have the following functions:


 The first alarm in sets the operation strategy for smoke control. Subsequent alarms do not
change the smoke control strategy operation. The first alarm in sets that zone ON, and the
other zones OFF. (See Equations 9, 11, 13, and 15.)
 The program checks proof sensors and reports equipment operation to the FSCS or, if such
proof is not received within a specified time from activation it reports any failure to the FSCS.
The delay time to allow sensors to operate is set at ten seconds for conversion in testing. This
delay time can be increased to accommodate the time it takes for the equipment to respond.
The maximum delay time is 60 seconds for fans (Equations 19 through 24) and 75 seconds for
dampers (Equations 25 through 46).
 Manual operation of the FSCS control switches overrides the automatic program. Manual
commands have a higher priority than automatic operations. (See Equations 47 through 74.)

Dedicated Smoke Dedicated smoke control system weekly self-test programs have the following functions:
Control System
Weekly Self-Test  Begins Saturday at 0000 hours if there is no alarm.
 Run once. Any failures sound an audible fault signal and light an indicator on the FSCS
showing the device that failed. In addition, the program displays “Weekly Smoke Control
Self-Test Failed (Time & Date).”

5-2
Dedicated Smoke Control System Weekly Self-Test

Custom Control The Custom Control equations in this example are written for 4100U/4100ES and 4010ES based
Programming smoke control systems, and show how to implement the Dedicated Smoke Control System
Example Weekly Self-Test requirement described on the previous page.

Note: The points mentioned are representative of any system. Your system uses different points
to provide the Inputs and Outputs. The following equations are provided as reference
material. The syntax may be slightly different than that shown. However, the logic and
content are the same.

The following list gives the Custom Control program (equation) number followed by a title
(or label) for the program.

Equation No. Label


------------- ---------------------------------------------------
1 START SELF TEST
2 TURN ON STAIR PRESSURE FAN
3 TEST STAIRWELL AIR PRESSURE
4 RESET STAIR PRESSURE FAN TO OFF
5 [END-OF-PROGRAM]

Equation 1: Label: START SELF TEST Equation 1


Start Self-Test
COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
When the day of week is Sat
AND If Analog: A6 is greater than value: 0 (Cnts)
AND If Analog: A6 is less than or equal to value: 3 (Cnts)
AND NOT the ON state of:
A0 ANALOG NUMBER OF SYSTEM FIRE ALARMS
OUTPUTS:
TRACK points ON pri=9,9
P281 UTILITY START SELF TEST PROGRAM
END:

Equation 2: Turn ON Label: TURN ON STAIR PRESSURE FAN Equation 2


Stair Pressure Fan
COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
P281 UTILITY START SELF TEST PROGRAM
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
END:

5-3
Dedicated Smoke Control System Weekly Self-Test, Continued

Equation 3: Label: TEST STAIRWELL AIR PRESSURE Equation 3


Test Stairwell
Air Pressure COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
P281 UTILITY START SELF TEST PROGRAM
AND the ON state of:
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
DELAY for 10 secs, running timer is A283
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-42 UTILITY MONITOR STAIR PRESS FAN ON
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P280 UTILITY STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
END:

Equation 4: Label: RESET STAIR PRESSURE FAN TO OFF Equation 4


Reset Stair Pressure
Fan to OFF COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
P281 UTILITY START SELF TEST PROGRAM
AND the ON state of:
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
DELAY for 60 secs, running timer is A284
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=9,9
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
P281 UTILITY START SELF TEST PROGRAM
PRINT to All ports/logs/displays
"SELF TEST PROGRAM IS COMPLETE"
END:

Equation 5: Label: [END-OF-PROGRAM] Equation 5


End of Program

5-4
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations

Introduction Note: See Chapter 7 for FSCS operation with TSW.

The following Custom Control (CC) equations are written for a 4100U/4100ES or 4010ES based
smoke control system using a wall-mounted graphic. Note that the points mentioned are
representative of any system. Your system will use different points to provide the Inputs and
Outputs.

Smoke Control The following “Custom Control Equation Summary” gives the CC equation number followed by a
System CC Equation label (title) for the program.
Summary
CUSTOM CONTROL EQUATION SUMMARY

Equation No. Label


------------------- ----------------------------------------
1 SET UP NORMAL CONDITIONS AT STARTUP
2 CLEAR FAULTS ON STARTUP
3 SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
4 REPORT TROUBLE IF SWITCHES NOT RESET
5 INITIALIZE NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
6 NORMAL CONDITIONS COMPLETE AFTER RESET
7 SMOKE CONTROL INITIATE
8 SMOKE CONTROL RESET
9 INITIATE SMOKE ZONE 1
10 ACTIVATE SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 1
11 INITIATE SMOKE ZONE 2
12 ACTIVATE SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 2
13 INITIATE SMOKE ZONE 3
14 ACTIVATE SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 3
15 INITIATE SMOKE ZONE 4
16 ACTIVATE SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 4
17 SUPPLY FAN DUCT SMOKE ALARM
18 STAIR PRESS FAN DUCT SMOKE ALARM
19 REPORT TBL IF SUPPLY FAN NOT ON
20 REPORT TBL IF SUPPLY FAN NOT OFF
21 REPORT TBL IF EXHAUST FAN NOT ON
22 REPORT TBL IF EXHAUST FAN NOT OFF
23 REPORT TBL IF STAIR PRESS FAN NOT ON
24 REPORT TBL IF STAIR PRESS FAN NOT OFF
25 REPORT TBL IF MAIN EXH DAMPER NOT OPEN
26 REPORT TBL IF MAIN EXH DAMPER NOT CLOSED
27 REPORT TBL IF MAIN SUP DAMPER NOT OPEN
28 REPORT TBL IF MAIN SUP DAMPER NOT CLOSED
29 REPORT TBL IF MAIN RET DAMPER NOT OPEN
30 REPORT TBL IF MAIN RET DAMPER NOT CLOSED
31 REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 1 NOT OPEN
32 REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 1 NOT CLOSED
33 REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 2 NOT OPEN
34 REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 2 NOT CLOSED
35 REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 3 NOT OPEN
36 REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 3 NOT CLOSED
37 REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 4 NOT OPEN
38 REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 4 NOT CLOSED
39 REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 1 NOT OPEN
40 REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 1 NOT CLOSED

Continued on next page

5-5
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Smoke Control Equation No. Label


System CC Equation ------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------
Summary 41 REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 2 NOT OPEN
42 REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 2 NOT CLOSED
43 REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 3 NOT OPEN
44 REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 3 NOT CLOSED
45 REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 4 NOT OPEN
46 REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 4 NOT CLOSED
47 MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 1 OPEN
48 MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 1 CLOSE
49 MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 2 OPEN
50 MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 2 CLOSE
51 MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 3 OPEN
52 MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 3 CLOSE
53 MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 4 OPEN
54 MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 4 CLOSE
55 MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 1 OPEN
56 MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 1 CLOSE
57 MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 2 OPEN
58 MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 2 CLOSE
59 MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 3 OPEN
60 MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 3 CLOSE
61 MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 4 OPEN
62 MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 4 CLOSE
63 MANUAL CONTROL STAIR PRESS FAN ON
64 MANUAL CONTROL STAIR PRESS FAN OFF
65 MANUAL CONTROL MAIN SUPPLY FAN ON
66 MANUAL CONTROL MAIN SUPPLY FAN OFF
67 MANUAL CONTROL MAIN RET AIR DAMPER OPEN
68 MANUAL CONTROL MAIN RET AIR DAMPER CLOSE
69 MANUAL CONTROL MAIN EXHAUST FAN ON
70 MANUAL CONTROL MAIN EXHAUST FAN OFF
71 MANUAL CONTROL MAIN SUP AIR DAMPER OPEN
72 MANUAL CONTROL MAIN SUP AIR DAMPER CLOSE
73 MANUAL CONTROL MAIN EXH AIR DAMPER OPEN
74 MANUAL CONTROL MAIN EXH AIR DAMPER CLOSE
75 MANUAL CONTROL CLEAR FAULTS
76 MASTER KEY SWITCH
77 TURN SONALERT ON
78 TURN SONALERT OFF
[END-OF-PROGRAM]

5-6
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 1: Label: SET UP NORMAL CONDITIONS AT STARTUP Equation 1


Set Up Normal
Conditions at COMMENTS:
Startup INPUTS:
The ON state of:
A34 TIMER SYSTEM STARTUP PULSE TIMER
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
M1-10 CPRESS SUPPLY FAN RELAY
M1-11 CPRESS EXHAUST FAN RELAY
M1-12 CDAMPER MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER
M1-13 CDAMPER MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER
M1-14 CDAMPER MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-15 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-16 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-17 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-18 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-19 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-20 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-21 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-22 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
P291 UTILITY SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT STARTUP
HOLD points OFF pri=9,9
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
END:

Equation 2: Label: CLEAR FAULTS ON STARTUP Equation 2


Clear Faults on
Startup COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
P291 UTILITY SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT STARTUP
DELAY for 30 sec., running timer is A293
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=9,9
P260 UTILITY FL1 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P261 UTILITY FL2 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P262 UTILITY FL3 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P263 UTILITY FL4 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P264 UTILITY FL1 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P265 UTILITY FL2 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P266 UTILITY FL3 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P267 UTILITY FL4 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P268 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
P269 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
P270 UTILITY MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
P271 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P272 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P280 UTILITY STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
P291 UTILITY SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT STARTUP
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P290 UTILITY SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
END:

5-7
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 3: Label: SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET Equation 3


Set Normal
Conditions at Reset COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
A21 TIMER SYSTEM RESET PULSE TIMER
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P290 UTILITY SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
END:

Equation 4: Label: SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET Equation 4


Set Normal
Conditions at Reset COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
OR the UP state of:
8-65 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 65 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-66 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 66 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-67 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 67 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-68 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 68 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-69 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 69 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-70 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 70 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-71 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 71 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-72 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 72 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-73 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 73 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-74 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 74 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-75 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 75 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-76 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 76 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-77 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 77 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-78 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 78 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-79 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 79 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
OR the DOWN state of:
8-65 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 65 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-66 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 66 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-67 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 67 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-68 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 68 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-69 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 69 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-70 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 70 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-71 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 71 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-72 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 72 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-73 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 73 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-74 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 74 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-75 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 75 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-76 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 76 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-77 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 77 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-78 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 78 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
8-79 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 79 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P290 UTILITY SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
OUTPUTS:
TRACK points ON pri=9,9
P256 TROUBLE FSCS SWITCHES NOT RESET
END:

5-8
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 5: Label: INITIALIZE NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET Equation 5


Initialize Normal
Conditions at Reset COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
P290 UTILITY SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
AND NOT the TROUBLE state of:
P256 TROUBLE FSCS SWITCHES NOT RESET
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=7,9
P275 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ALARM INITIATE
P276 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 1 INITIATE
P277 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 2 INITIATE
P278 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 3 INITIATE
P279 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 4 INITIATE
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
M1-10 CPRESS SUPPLY FAN RELAY
M1-11 CPRESS EXHAUST FAN RELAY
M1-12 CDAMPER MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER
M1-13 CDAMPER MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER
M1-14 CDAMPER MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-15 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-16 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-17 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-18 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-19 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-20 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-21 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-22 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
HOLD points OFF pri=9,9
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
END:

Equation 6: Label: NORMAL CONDITIONS COMPLETE AFTER RESET Equation 6


Normal Conditions
Complete After COMMENTS:
Reset INPUTS:
The ON state of:
P290 UTILITY SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
AND NOT the TROUBLE state of:
P256 TROUBLE FSCS SWITCHES NOT RESET
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A294
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=9,9
P290 UTILITY SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
END:

5-9
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 7: Label: SMOKE CONTROL INITIATE Equation 7


Smoke Control
Initiate COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
A0 ANALOG NUMBER OF SYSTEM FIRE ALARMS
OUTPUTS:
TRACK points ON pri=9,9
P275 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ALARM INITIATE
PULSE analog: A280, for 2 sec.
END:

Equation 8: Label: SMOKE CONTROL RESET Equation 8


Smoke Control
Reset COMMENTS:
Any Fire alarm turn OFF all Pseudos that may be used in testing
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
A280 TIMER CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=9,9
P260 UTILITY FL1 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P261 UTILITY FL2 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P262 UTILITY FL3 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P263 UTILITY FL4 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P264 UTILITY FL1 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P265 UTILITY FL2 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P266 UTILITY FL3 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P267 UTILITY FL4 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P268 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
P269 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
P270 UTILITY MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
P271 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P272 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 9: Label: INITIATE SMOKE ZONE 1 Equation 9


Initiate Smoke
Zone 1 COMMENTS:
An alarm in Zone 1 turns ON smoke control for zone 1, turns others OFF
INPUTS:
The DETECT state of:
M1-1 FIRE 1ST FLOOR SMOKE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=8,8
P276 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 1 INITIATE
HOLD points OFF pri=7,7
P277 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 2 INITIATE
P278 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 3 INITIATE
P279 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 4 INITIATE
END:

5-10
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 10: Label: ACTIVATE SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 1 Equation 10


Activate Smoke
Control Zone 1 COMMENTS:
The 5 second delay allows points that may be ON in test to be turned
OFF prior to being turned ON by this smoke control equation.
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
P276 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 1 INITIATE
DELAY for 5 sec., running timer is A256
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
M1-20 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-21 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-22 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-14 CDAMPER MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-15 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
M1-11 CPRESS EXHAUST FAN RELAY
M1-13 CDAMPER MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER
M1-19 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-15 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
END:

Equation 11: Label: INITIATE SMOKE ZONE 2 Equation 11


Initiate Smoke
Zone 2 COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DETECT state of:
M1-2 FIRE 2ND FLOOR SMOKE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=8,8
P277 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 2 INITIATE
HOLD points OFF pri=7,7
P276 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 1 INITIATE
P278 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 3 INITIATE
P279 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 4 INITIATE
END:

5-11
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 12: Label: ACTIVATE SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 2 Equation 12


Activate Smoke
Control Zone 2 COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
P277 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 2 INITIATE
DELAY for 5 sec., running timer is A285
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
M1-14 CDAMPER MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-19 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-21 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-22 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-16 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
M1-11 CPRESS EXHAUST FAN RELAY
M1-13 CDAMPER MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER
M1-16 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-20 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
END:

Equation 13: Label: INITIATE SMOKE ZONE 3 Equation 13


Initiate Smoke
Zone 3 COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DETECT state of:
M1-3 FIRE 3RD FLOOR SMOKE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=8,8
P278 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 3 INITIATE
HOLD points OFF pri=7,7
P276 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 1 INITIATE
P277 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 2 INITIATE
P279 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 4 INITIATE
END:

5-12
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 14: Label: ACTIVATE SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 3 Equation 14


Activate Smoke
Control Zone 3 COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
P278 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 3 INITIATE
DELAY for 5 sec., running timer is A286
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
M1-14 CDAMPER MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-19 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-20 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-22 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-17 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
M1-11 CPRESS EXHAUST FAN RELAY
M1-13 CDAMPER MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER
M1-17 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-21 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
END:

Equation 15: Label: INITIATE SMOKE ZONE 4 Equation 15


Initiate Smoke
Zone 4 COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DETECT state of:
M1-4 FIRE 4TH FLOOR SMOKE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=8,8
P279 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 4 INITIATE
HOLD points OFF pri=7,7
P276 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 1 INITIATE
P277 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 2 INITIATE
P278 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 3 INITIATE
END:

5-13
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 16: Label: ACTIVATE SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 4 Equation 16


Activate Smoke
Control Zone 4 COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
P279 UTILITY SMOKE CONTROL ZONE 4 INITIATE
DELAY for 5 sec., running timer is A287
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
M1-14 CDAMPER MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-19 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-20 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-21 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-18 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
M1-11 CPRESS EXHAUST FAN RELAY
M1-13 CDAMPER MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER
M1-18 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
M1-22 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
END:

Equation 17: Label: SUPPLY FAN DUCT SMOKE ALARM Equation 17


Supply Fan Duct
Smoke Alarm COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DETECT state of:
M1-6 FIRE ROOF TOP SUPPLY DUCT SMOKE DET
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=9,9
M1-10 CPRESS SUPPLY FAN RELAY
END:

Equation 18: Label: STAIR PRESS FAN DUCT SMOKE ALARM Equation 18
Stair Press Fan Duct
Smoke Alarm COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DETECT state of:
M1-5 FIRE STAIR SUPPLY DUCT SMOKE DET
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=9,9
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
END:

5-14
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 19: Label: REPORT TBL IF SUPPLY FAN NOT ON Equation 19


Report TBL if
Supply Fan Not ON COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-10 CPRESS SUPPLY FAN RELAY
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A264
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-41 UTILITY MONITOR SUPPLY FAN ON
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P268 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
END:

Equation 20: Label: REPORT TBL IF SUPPLY FAN NOT OFF Equation 20
Report TBL if
Supply Fan Not OFF COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-10 CPRESS SUPPLY FAN RELAY
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A292
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-50 UTILITY MONITOR SUPPLY FAN OFF
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P268 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
END:

Equation 21: Label: REPORT TBL IF EXHAUST FAN NOT ON Equation 21


Report TBL if
Exhaust Fan Not ON COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-11 CPRESS EXHAUST FAN RELAY
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A263
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-43 UTILITY MONITOR EXHAUST FAN ON
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P269 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
END:

Equation 22: Label: REPORT TBL IF EXHAUST FAN NOT OFF Equation 22
Report TBL
if Exhaust Fan COMMENTS:
Not OFF INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-11 CPRESS EXHAUST FAN RELAY
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A291
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-44 UTILITY MONITOR EXHAUST FAN OFF
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P269 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
END:

5-15
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 23: Label: REPORT TBL IF STAIR PRESS FAN NOT ON Equation 23
Report TBL if Stair
Press Fan Not ON COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A265
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-42 UTILITY MONITOR STAIR PRESS FAN ON
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P280 UTILITY STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
END:

Equation 24: Label: REPORT TBL IF STAIR PRESS FAN NOT OFF Equation 24
Report TBL if Stair
Press Fan Not OFF COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A290
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-47 UTILITY MONITOR STAIR PRESS FAN OFF
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P280 UTILITY STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
END:

Equation 25: Label: REPORT TBL IF MAIN EXH DAMPER NOT OPEN Equation 25
Report TBL if
Main EXH Damper COMMENTS:
Not Open INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-13 CDAMPER MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A262
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-51 UTILITY MONITOR MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P272 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 26: Label: REPORT TBL IF MAIN EXH DAMPER NOT CLOSED Equation 26
Report TBL if
Main EXH Damper COMMENTS:
Not Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-13 CDAMPER MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A281
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-52 UTILITY MONITOR MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P272 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

5-16
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 27: Label: REPORT TBL IF MAIN SUP DAMPER NOT OPEN Equation 27
Report TBL if
Main SUP Damper COMMENTS:
Not Open INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-12 CDAMPER MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A266
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-48 UTILITY MONITOR OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P271 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 28: Label: REPORT TBL IF MAIN SUP DAMPER NOT CLOSED Equation 28
Report TBL if Main
SUP Damper Not COMMENTS:
Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-12 CDAMPER MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A267
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-49 UTILITY MONITOR OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P271 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 29: Label: REPORT TBL IF MAIN RET DAMPER NOT OPEN Equation 29
Report TBL if
Main RET Damper COMMENTS:
Not Open INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-14 CDAMPER MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A268
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-45 UTILITY MONITOR MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P270 UTILITY MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 30: Label: REPORT TBL IF MAIN RET DAMPER NOT CLOSED Equation 30
Report TBL if Main
RET Damper Not COMMENTS:
Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-14 CDAMPER MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A269
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-46 UTILITY MONITOR MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P270 UTILITY MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

5-17
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 31: Label: REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 1 NOT OPEN Equation 31
Report TBL If SUP
Damper 1 Not Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-15 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A257
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-25 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 1 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P260 UTILITY FL1 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 32: Label: REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 1 NOT CLOSED Equation 32
Report TBL If
SUP Damper 1 COMMENTS:
Not Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-15 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A282
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-29 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 1 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P260 UTILITY FL1 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 33: Label: REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 2 NOT OPEN Equation 33
Report TBL If SUP
Damper 2 Not Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-16 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A270
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-26 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 2 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P261 UTILITY FL2 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 34: Label: REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 2 NOT CLOSED Equation 34
Report TBL If
Sup Damper 2 COMMENTS:
Not Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-16 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A271
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-30 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 2 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P261 UTILITY FL2 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

5-18
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 35: Label: REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 3 NOT OPEN Equation 35
Report TBL If SUP
Damper 3 Not Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-17 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A272
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-27 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 3 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P262 UTILITY FL3 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 36: Label: REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 3 NOT CLOSED Equation 36
Report TBL If
SUP Damper 3 COMMENTS:
Not Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-17 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A273
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-31 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 3 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P262 UTILITY FL3 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 37: Label: REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 4 NOT OPEN Equation 37
Report TBL If SUP
Damper 4 Not Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-18 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A274
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-28 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 4 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P263 UTILITY FL4 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 38: Label: REPORT TBL IF SUP DAMPER 4 NOT CLOSED Equation 38
Report TBL If
SUP Damper 4 COMMENTS:
Not Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-18 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A275
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-32 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 4 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P263 UTILITY FL4 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

5-19
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 39: Label: REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 1 NOT OPEN Equation 39
Report TBL if EXH
Damper 1 Not Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-19 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A258
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-33 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 1 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P264 UTILITY FL1 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 40: Label: REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 1 NOT CLOSED Equation 40
Report TBL If EXH
Damper 1 Not COMMENTS:
Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-19 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A276
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-37 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 1 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P264 UTILITY FL1 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 41: Label: REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 2 NOT OPEN Equation 41
Report TBL If EXH
Damper 2 Not Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-20 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A277
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-34 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 2 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P265 UTILITY FL2 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 42: Label: REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 2 NOT CLOSED Equation 42
Report TBL If
EXH Damper 2 COMMENTS:
Not Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-20 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A259
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-38 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 2 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P265 UTILITY FL2 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

5-20
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 43: Label: REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 3 NOT OPEN Equation 43
Report TBL If EXH
Damper 3 Not Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-21 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A278
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-35 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 3 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P266 UTILITY FL3 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 44: Label: REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 3 NOT CLOSED Equation 44
Report TBL If
EXH Damper 3 COMMENTS:
Not Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-21 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A260
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-39 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 3 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P266 UTILITY FL3 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 45: Label: REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 4 NOT OPEN Equation 45
Report TBL If EXH
Damper 4 Not Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The ON state of:
M1-22 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A279
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-36 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 4 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER OPEN
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P267 UTILITY FL4 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

Equation 46: Label: REPORT TBL IF EXH DAMPER 4 NOT CLOSED Equation 46
Report TBL If
EXH Damper 4 COMMENTS:
Not Closed INPUTS:
NOT the ON state of:
M1-22 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
DELAY for 10 sec., running timer is A261
AND NOT the ON state of:
M1-40 UTILITY MONITOR FLR 4 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER CLOSED
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P267 UTILITY FL4 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
END:

5-21
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 47: Label: MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 1 OPEN Equation 47
Manual Control SUP
AIR Damper 1 Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-66 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 66 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=5,9
M1-15 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 48: Label: MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 1 CLOSE Equation 48
Manual Control SUP
Air Damper 1 Close COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-66 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 66 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=5,9
M1-15 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 49: Label: MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 2 OPEN Equation 49
Manual Control SUP
Air Damper 2 Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-68 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 68 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=5,9
M1-16 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 50: Label: MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 2 CLOSE Equation 50
Manual Control SUP
Air Damper 2 Close COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-68 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 68 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=5,9
M1-16 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
END:

5-22
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 51: Label: MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 3 OPEN Equation 51
Manual Control SUP
Air Damper 3 Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-70 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 70 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=5,9
M1-17 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 52: Label: MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 3 CLOSE Equation 52
Manual Control SUP
Air Damper 3 Close COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-70 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 70 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=5,9
M1-17 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 53: Label: MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 4 OPEN Equation 53
Manual Control SUP
Air Damper 4 Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-72 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 72 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=5,9
M1-18 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 54: Label: MANUAL CONTROL SUP AIR DAMPER 4 CLOSE Equation 54
Control SUP Air
Damper 4 Close COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-72 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 72 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=5,9
M1-18 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DAMPER
END:

5-23
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 55: Label: MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 1 OPEN Equation 55
Manual Control EXH
Air Damper 1 Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-67 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 67 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=5,9
M1-19 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 56: Label: MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 1 CLOSE Equation 56
Manual Control EXH
Air Damper 1 Close COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-67 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 67 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=5,9
M1-19 CDAMPER 1ST FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 57: Label: MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 2 OPEN Equation 57
Manual Control EXH
Air Damper 2 Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-69 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 69 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=5,9
M1-20 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 58: Label: MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 2 CLOSE Equation 58
Manual Control EXH
Air Damper 2 Close COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-69 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 69 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=5,9
M1-20 CDAMPER 2ND FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
END:

5-24
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 59: Label: MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 3 OPEN Equation 59
Control EXH Air
Damper 3 Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-71 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 71 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=5,9
M1-21 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 60: Label: MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 3 CLOSE Equation 60
Manual Control EXH
Air Damper 3 Close COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-71 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 71 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=5,9
M1-21 CDAMPER 3RD FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 61: Label: MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 4 OPEN Equation 61
Manual Control EXH
Air Damper 4 Open COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-73 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 73 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=5,9
M1-22 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 62: Label: MANUAL CONTROL EXH AIR DAMPER 4 CLOSE Equation 62
Manual Control EXH
Air Damper 4 Close COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-73 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 73 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=5,9
M1-22 CDAMPER 4TH FLOOR EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DAMPER
END:

5-25
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 63: Label: MANUAL CONTROL STAIR PRESS FAN ON Equation 63


Manual Control Stair
Press Fan ON COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-65 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 65 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=8,9
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
END:

Equation 64: Label: MANUAL CONTROL STAIR PRESS FAN OFF Equation 64
Manual Control Stair
Press Fan OFF COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-65 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 65 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
M1-9 CPRESS STAIR PRESS FAN
END:

Equation 65: Label: MANUAL CONTROL MAIN SUPPLY FAN ON Equation 65


Manual Control Main
Supply Fan ON
COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-74 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 74 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=8,9
M1-10 CPRESS SUPPLY FAN RELAY
END:

Equation 66: Label: MANUAL CONTROL MAIN SUPPLY FAN OFF Equation 66
Manual Control Main
Supply Fan OFF COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-74 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 74 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
M1-10 CPRESS SUPPLY FAN RELAY
END:

5-26
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 67: Label: MANUAL CONTROL MAIN RET AIR DAMPER OPEN Equation 67
Manual Control
Main RET Air COMMENTS:
Damper Open INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-75 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 75 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=8,9
M1-14 CDAMPER MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 68: Label: MANUAL CONTROL MAIN RET AIR DAMPER CLOSE Equation 68
Manual Control
Main RET Air COMMENTS:
Damper Close INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-75 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 75 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
M1-14 CDAMPER MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 69: Label: MANUAL CONTROL MAIN EXHAUST FAN ON Equation 69


Manual Control Main
Exhaust Fan ON COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-76 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 76 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=8,9
M1-11 CPRESS EXHAUST FAN RELAY
END:

Equation 70: Label: MANUAL CONTROL MAIN EXHAUST FAN OFF Equation 70
Manual Control Main
Exhaust Fan OFF COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-76 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 76 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
M1-11 CPRESS EXHAUST FAN RELAY
END:

5-27
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 71: Label: MANUAL CONTROL MAIN SUP AIR DAMPER OPEN Equation 71
Manual Control
Main SUP Air COMMENTS:
Damper Open INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-77 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 77 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=8,9
M1-12 CDAMPER MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 72: Label: MANUAL CONTROL MAIN SUP AIR DAMPER CLOSE Equation 72
Manual Control
Main Sup Air COMMENTS:
Damper Close INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-77 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 77 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
M1-12 CDAMPER MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 73: Label: MANUAL CONTROL MAIN EXH AIR DAMPER OPEN Equation 73
Manual Control
Main EXH Air COMMENTS:
Damper Open INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-78 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 78 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=8,9
M1-13 CDAMPER MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER
END:

Equation 74: Label: MANUAL CONTROL MAIN EXH AIR DAMPER CLOSE Equation 74
Manual Control
Main EXH Air COMMENTS:
Damper Close INPUTS:
The DOWN state of:
8-78 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 78 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
M1-13 CDAMPER MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER
END:

5-28
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 75: Label: MANUAL CONTROL CLEAR FAULTS Equation 75


Manual Control
Clear Faults COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-80 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 80 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
AND the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=9,9
P260 UTILITY FL1 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P261 UTILITY FL2 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P262 UTILITY FL3 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P263 UTILITY FL4 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P264 UTILITY FL1 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P265 UTILITY FL2 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P266 UTILITY FL3 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P267 UTILITY FL4 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P268 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
P269 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
P270 UTILITY MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
P271 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P272 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P280 UTILITY STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
END:

Equation 76: Label: MASTER KEY SWITCH Equation 76


Master Key-Switch
COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-81 SWITCH Ann 1 Pt 81 Graphic LED/SW Ctlr w/32
OUTPUTS:
TRACK points ON pri=8,9
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
END:

5-29
Smoke Control System Custom Control Equations, Continued

Equation 77: Label: TURN SONALERT ON Equation 77


Turn SONALERT ON
COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
OR the ON state of:
P260 UTILITY FL1 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P261 UTILITY FL2 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P262 UTILITY FL3 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P263 UTILITY FL4 SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P264 UTILITY FL1 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P265 UTILITY FL2 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P266 UTILITY FL3 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P267 UTILITY FL4 EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P268 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
P269 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
P270 UTILITY MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
P271 UTILITY MAIN SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
P272 UTILITY MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
P280 UTILITY STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
AND NOT the ON state of:
P290 UTILITY SET NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points ON pri=9,9
P293 UTILITY PIEZO ACTIVATE
END:

Equation 78: Label: TURN SONALERT OFF Equation 78


Turn SONALERT
OFF COMMENTS:
INPUTS:
The UP state of:
8-82 SWITCH SILENCE SWITCH
And the ON state of:
P273 UTILITY MASTER KEY SWITCH ENABLE
OUTPUTS:
HOLD points OFF pri=8,9
P293 UTILITY PIEZO ACTIVATE
END:

Label: [END-OF-PROGRAM]

5-30
Chapter 6.
Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming

Introduction This chapter contains instructions to set up TSW as a Single or Dual Monitor system. See sections
“TrueSite Workstation (TSW) as an FSCS”, “FSCS Setup for Single Monitor” and “FSCS/TSW
Setup for Dual Monitors” in Chapter 3 for information.

In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.

Topic See Page #


Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming 6-2

6-1
Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming

FSCS Application Table 6-1 lists the selections that are permitted for FSCS operation and the available programming
options. Use this table to meet UL requirements when programming the job.

NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AND


OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES - This product incorporates field-programmable software. In
order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and
Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, section 48 Firefighter’s Smoke-Control Station
(FSCS) certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at
all as indicated below.

Table 6-1. FSCS Application—TrueSite Workstation Configurator


Settings permitted in UL 864 for
Program feature or Possible
Permitted in UL 864? (Y/N) FSCS where level 3 access code is
option (Configure) settings
required for FSCS
Single and Dual Monitor Setup
Auto Jump (Y) (required)
Auto ACK (Y) Auto Jump
Beep for unacked Points (Y) Beep for unacked Points
Always display run-time header (Y)
Optional Single and Dual
Beep on button press (Y)
Monitor(s)
Close window on ACK (Y) Selected
24 hour time format
System 24 hour time format (Y) (ticked) or
Close window on ACK
Options/Preference Header always goto Active List (Y) not selected
Celsius Temperature Format
Double click shows action msg (Y) (unticked)
Inactivity Timeout
Quiet PC on first acknowledgement (Y)
Flash normal if ALL UnAck normal (Y) Optional Dual Monitor only
Reverse Active List Display (Y) Double click shows action msg
Celsius Temperature Format (Y) Quiet PC on first acknowledgement
Inactivity Timeout (Y) Flash normal if ALL UnAck normal
Reverse Active List Display

Single and Dual Monitor Setup


required)
System Reset Inhibit (Y) Annunciate Common Trouble
Alarm Silence Inhibit (Y) Annunciate Network Trouble
Enable Network Reset (Y) Fixed Common Trouble Offset
Enable Network Alarm Silence (Y) Special Analog Network Initialization
Master Timekeeper (Y) Optional Dual Monitor only
Annunciate Common Trouble (Y) Selected System Reset Inhibit
System Annunciate Network Trouble (Y) (ticked) or Alarm Silence Inhibit
Options/Operations Fixed Common Trouble Offset (Y) not selected Enable Network Reset
Individual ACK (Y) (unticked) Enable Network Alarm Silence
Group ACK (Y) Master Timekeeper
Global ACK (Y) Individual ACK (required for
Special Analog Network Initialization (Y) Proprietary Supervising Station)
Auto- Ack 2120 UNKNOWN UNACKED Group ACK
points (Y) Global ACK
Auto- Ack 2120 unknown unacked
points
Access
System Options/
levels are
Operator Access/ Access level 3 or higher required for
0-6, with 6
Runtime Access FSCS operation
being the
Levels
highest

Continued on next page

6-2
Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming, Continued

FSCS Application Table 6-1. TrueSite Workstation Configurator, Continued

Settings permitted in UL 864 for


Program feature or Possible
Permitted in UL 864? (Y/N) FSCS where level 3 access code is
option (Configure) settings
required for FSCS
Historical Log (Y)
Service (Y)
Operator’s log (Y)
View Active List (Y)
Set Time and Date (Y) Single Monitor Setup (required)
Editors (Y) Graphics (level 3)
Main Menu Item Access level All others ( above level 3)
Status Control (Y)
Visibility 0-6
Graphics (Y) Dual Monitor Setup
Utility Control (Y) All
Audio Control (Y)
Phone Control (Y)
4120 Network (Y)
Site Information (Y)

Alarm Silence (Y)


System Reset (Y)
Security system reset (Y)
Quiet PC (N)
Fire Acknowledgement (Y)
Security Acknowledgement(Y) Single Monitor Setup
Supervisory Acknowledgement (Y) All except Quiet PC ( above level 3)
System-Wide Trouble Acknowledgement (Y) Access level Quiet PC (N)
Functions Print reports (Y) 0-6
Network Download (Y) Dual Monitor Setup
Terminal Mode (Y) All except Quiet PC
Channel Status (Y)
Type in Feature Code dialog (Y)
Test-Mode (Y)
RAID activity Acknowledgement (Y)
Email Management (Y)

Reset PC (Y) Single Monitor Setup


Exit/Disconnect (Y) All (above level 3)
Job Selection (Y)
Access level Dual Monitor Setup
Service Network diagnostic (Y)
0-6 Reset PC (above level 3)
Calibrate Screen (Y)
About (Y) Exit/Disconnect (above level 3)
Printer Setup (Y) All others

Enable/Disable (Y)
Arm/Disarm (Y)
On/Off/Auto (Y) Single Monitor Setup
Change user pseudo status (Y) On/Off/Auto ( level 3)
Point Status and Change TrueAlarm sensitivity (Y) Access level All others ( above level 3)
Control Clear peak value (Y) 0-6
Clear Alarm verification tally (Y) Dual Monitor Setup
Simulator mode (Y) All
Change sys. Point/DACR restore (Y)
View action Message (Y)

Continued on next page

6-3
Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming, Continued

FSCS Application

Table 6-1. TrueSite Workstation Configurator, Continued

Settings permitted in UL 864 for


Program feature or Possible
Permitted in UL 864? (Y/N) FSCS where level 3 access code is
option (Configure) settings
required for FSCS
Close active volume (Y)
Change volume label (Y) Single and Dual Monitor Setup
Export volume (Y) Access level All (above level 4)
Historical Log
Delete volume (Y) 0-6 Dual Monitor Setup
Backup volume (Y) All
Restore volume (Y)
Single and Dual Monitor Setup
Moving Toolbars and Windows (Y) All (above level 4)
Application Access level
Application Setup (Y)
Preferences 0-6 Dual Monitor Setup
UI Preferences (Y)
All (above level 4)

TSW has 7 access levels, 0-6. Access levels are used to prohibit unauthorized use of specific
Graphic Screen
Setup functions. For FSCS operation described in this manual, levels 3 and above (4, 5, or 6) are
authorized to perform Smoke Management operations.
Follow instructions below to setup Single and Dual Monitor systems for FSCS operation. For
Single Monitor systems the Graphic Home screen is set to be visible when the user logs in at level
3. For Dual Monitor systems the Graphic Home screen is set to be visible on the second monitor
when the user logs in at level 3.
Dual Screen Application
1. Start the TSW application and log in at level 3.
2. Select the Graphic Home screen and select the Floating option. Move the screen to the
second monitor and maximize it (Figure 6-1).

Figure 6-1. Graphic Home Screen on a Dual Screen Application

Continued on next page

6-4
Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming, Continued

Graphic Screen Single Screen Application


Setup
1. Start the TSW application and log in at level 3.
2. Select the Graphic Home screen, maximize it and deselect the Toolbars (Figure 6-2). Exit
TSW.

Figure 6-2. Graphic Home Screen on a Single Screen Application

Captive Mode Setup Captive Mode must be applied for both Single and Dual Monitor Systems. When in Captive mode
the workstation occupies the whole PC screen. No task bar is displayed, the Windows task bar is
hidden, and Windows features cannot be accessed. Follow the instructions below to set up Captive
Mode.
1. In TSW, click on File and then on Application Setup. Select the Operation tab (Figure 6-3).

Figure 6-3. Operation Tab


2. Select Captive Environment and click on OK.
3. Click on Yes to restart TSW.

6-5
Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming, Continued

Programming Follow the instructions below to program the application options.


Application Options
1. Launch the TSW Configurator.
2. Click on Configure, then on Operator, then Access and then on Runtime Access Levels
(Figure 6-4).
3. Select Application Preferences and click OK.

Figure 6-4. Application Preferences Option


4. Click on Edit. The Edit Application Preferences screen is displayed.

Figure 6-5. Edit Application Preferences


5. In the Edit Application Preferences screen remove the checkmarks below level 3 for
Moving Toolbars and Windows, Application Setup, UI Preferences.
6. Click OK until you get back to the main Configurator screen.
The chart at the beginning of this chapter lists the available programming options and the
selections permitted for UUKL operation. Use this chart to program the job for UL requirements.

6-6
Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming, Continued

Fire, Pri2, The Dual Monitor application requires the Fire, Pri2, Supervisory and Trouble icons to be
Supervisory and on each screen. Two icons are required for each application. One flashes on unacked events and
Trouble Icons the other stays on steady after acknowledgement. In this example, Fire uses A7 and A8, Pri2 uses
A10 and A11, Supervisory uses A13 and A14 and Trouble uses A16 and A17 (see Figures 6-6, 6-
7, 6-8 and 6-9 respectively). The priority level is set at 3. The icon used for unacked events is
slightly larger than the other.

Figure 6-6. Fire Icons

Continued on next page

6-7
Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming, Continued

Fire, Pri2,
Supervisory and
Trouble Icons

Figure 6-7. Pri2 Icons

Figure 6-8. Supervisory Icons


Continued on next page

6-8
Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming, Continued

Fire, Pri2,
Supervisory and
Trouble Icons

Figure 6-9. Trouble Icons

6-9
Single and Dual Monitor Setup/Programming, Continued

Single and Dual A Test Screen Icon must be located on the 'Home' Screen. This functions as a Lamp Test, allowing
Monitor Test Screen the operator to verify the condition of the screen. Figure 6-10 shows a Command Link to 'GoTo' a
Icon Setup screen that is set up to be a solid color. In this figure Green is the color and name of the used
screen.

Figure 6-10. Test Screen Icon

6-10
Chapter 7.
4100ES and TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples

Introduction This chapter demonstrates sample programming steps for 4100ES and TSW. Use these steps as a
guide when programming jobs.

In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.

Topic See Page #


TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples 7-2
4100ES Programming Example 7-22

7-1
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples

Single Monitor and In the programming example below, the 4100ES is connected to 4100-9118 Relay IAMs (see
Dual Monitor Chapter 4: “Installing the Smoke Control System” for other devices that could be used). The TSW
Programming (FSCS) Graphics screen in Figure 7-1 shows the status of each fan and damper, along with arrows
Example that indicate air flow. Each of the four floors shown is divided into two smoke zones. These zones
can be controlled automatically, individually or by zone. An example of the results after a Fire
Alarm has been initiated is also shown in the Home screen (Figure 7-1) and the Active Floor
screen.

For simplicity, only four of the 12 floors are shown in the Home screen. The main fans and
dampers are shown for a general overview. Each must indicate if they are ON, OFF, OPEN
CLOSED or at FAULT. The arrows indicate the direction of air-flow. On each floor there is an
indicator that shows if there is an alarm. A Dual Monitor layout is shown, with the Alarm List
icons in the dedicated area.
FigureTag FD4-465-04

Figure 7-1. Example of the Dual Monitor Application Home Screen when in the Programmer

Continued on next page

7-2
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

The screen illustrated in Figure 7-2 has Pan and Zoom capability and shows Floors 1- 4 in more
Single Monitor and detail. Control by Zone is done in the area on the left of the screen and the zones contain
Dual Monitor Automatic, Pressure and Exhaust control icons. The smoke zones contain individual damper
Programming controls and indicators. Main Fan and Damper Controls and Indicators are also shown. A Dual
Example Monitor layout is shown with Alarm List Icons in the dedicated area.
FigureTag FD4-465-05

Figure 7-2. Dual Monitor Application Showing Floors 1 – 4 with all the Controls

Continued on next page

7-3
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Single Monitor and The Home screen in Figure 7-3 shows the results of a Fire Alarm on the second floor, Area A
Dual Monitor (left side). There are no Alarm List icons in dedicated area because a Single Monitor application is
Programming shown.
Example
FigureTag FD4-465-06

Figure 7-3. Single Monitor Application Home Screen with a Fire Alarm on Second Floor

Continued on next page

7-4
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Single Monitor and The Home screen in Figure 7-4 shows the results of a Fire Alarm on the second Floor, Area A (left
Dual Monitor side). This figure shows the status of all fans, dampers and zone controls. The Alarm List icons
Programming appear in the dedicated area because this is a Dual Monitor layout.
Example
FigureTag FD4-465-07

Figure 7-4. Dual Monitor Application Showing Floors 1 – 4 with a Fire Alarm on Second Floor

Continued on next page

7-5
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Single Monitor and The screen in Figure 7-5 shows the results of a Fire Alarm on the second Floor, Area A (left side).
Dual Monitor This figure shows the status of all fans, dampers and zone controls. The Alarm List icons appear at
Programming the top of the screen because this is a Single Monitor layout.
Example FigureTag FD4-465-08

Figure 7-5. Single Monitor Application Showing Floors 1 – 4 with a Fire Alarm on Second Floor

Continued on next page

7-6
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Single Monitor The screen in Figure 7-6 shows the results of a Fire Alarm on the second Floor, Area A (left side).
and Dual This figure shows the status of all fans, dampers and zone controls. The Alarm List icons appear in
Monitor the dedicated area because this is a Dual Monitor layout.
Programming
Example
FigureTag FD4-465-09

Figure 7-6. Dual Monitor Application Showing Floors 1 – 4 with a Fire Alarm on Second Floor

7-7
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

The command and color change links in this section are directly related to the 4100ES
Programming TSW programming outlined in the following section “4100ES Programming Example”.
Features FigureTag FD4-465-10

Figure 7-7. Zone Area Layout 1st Floor Area A

The following command is used in Equation 3-97 in the next section.


FigureTag FD4-465-11

Figure 7-8. Command Link for 1st Floor Area A Automatic

Continued on next page

7-8
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Programming TSW
Features The following command is used in Equation 3-99 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-12

Figure 7-9. Command Link for 1st Floor Area A Pressure


The following command is used in Equation 3-100 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-13

Figure 7-10. Command Link for 1st Floor Area A Exhaust

Continued on next page

7-9
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

The following color change is used in Equation 3-113 in the next section.
Programming TSW FigureTag FD4-465-14
Features

Figure 7-11. Color Change for 1st Floor Area A Automatic LED
The following color change is used in Equation 3-43 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-15

Figure 7-12. Color Change for 1st Floor Area A Pressure ON LED

Continued on next page

7-10
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

The following color change is used in Equation 3-44 in the next section.
Programming TSW FigureTag FD4-465-16
Features

Figure 7-13. Color Change for 1st Floor Area A Exhaust ON LED
The following color change is used in Equation 3-45 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-17

Figure 7-14. Color Change for 1st Floor Area A Fault LED

7-11
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

The following example shows typical programming for individual dampers. Programming for
pressure or exhaust control and indicators is similar.
FigureTag FD4-465-18
Programming for
Individual Dampers

Figure 7-15. 1st Floor Area A Pressure Damper Layout, Dual Monitor
The following command is used in Equation 5-17 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-19

Figure 7-16. Command Link for 1st Floor Area A Pressure Damper Automatic

Continued on next page

7-12
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

The following command is used in Equation 5-19 in the next section.


Programming for FigureTag FD4-465-20
Individual Dampers

Figure 7-17. Command Link for 1st Floor Level A Pressure Damper OPEN
The following command is used in Equation 5-20 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-21

Figure 7-18. Command Link for 1st Floor Area A Pressure Damper CLOSE

Continued on next page

7-13
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

The following color change is used in Equation 5-21 in the next section.
Programming for FigureTag FD4-465-22
Individual Dampers

stt
Figure
Figure
F igure
igure 16-x
7-17
7-1
177 CColor Change ffor
ollor Ch or 1 Floor
Fll A
Area
rea A A
Automac
uttomaic LLed
ed
d

Figure 7-19. Color Change for 1st Floor Area A Automatic LED
The following color change is used in Equation 5-1 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-23

Figure 7-20. Color Change for 1st Floor Area A Automatic OPEN

Continued on next page

7-14
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

The following color change is used in Equation 5-2 in the next section.
Programming for FigureTag FD4-465-24
Individual Dampers

Figure 7-21. Color Change for 1st Floor Area A CLOSED LED
The following color change is used in Equation 3-27 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-25

Figure 7-22. Color Change for 1st Floor Area A Fault LED

7-15
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Programming for The following example shows typical programming for individual fans. The main supply fan is
Individual Fans shown.
FigureTag FD4-465-26

Figure 7-23. Programming the Main Supply Fan


The following command is used in Equation 3-62 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-27

Figure 7-24. Command Link for Main Supply Fan Automatic

Continued on next page

7-16
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Programming for
The following command is used in Equation 3-64 in the next section.
Individual Fans FigureTag FD4-465-28

Figure 7-25. Command Link for Main Supply Fan ON


The following command is used in Equation 3-65 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-29

Figure 7-26. Command Link for Main Supply Fan OFF

Continued on next page

7-17
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Programming for The following color change is used in Equation 3-66 in the next section.
Individual Fans FigureTag FD4-465-30

Figure 7-27. Color Change Link for Main Supply Fan Automatic LED
The following color change is used in Equation 3-67 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-31

Figure 7-28. Color Change Link for Main Supply Fan ON LED

Continued on next page

7-18
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Programming for The following color change is used in Equation 3-68 in the next section.
Individual Fans FigureTag FD4-465-32

Figure 7-29. Color Change Link for Main Supply Fan OFF LED
The following color change is used in Equation 3-15 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-33

Figure 6-x Color change link for Main Supply Fan Fault Led

Figure 7-30. Color Change Link for Main Supply Fan Fault LED

Continued on next page

7-19
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Programming for The following color change is used in Equation 3-1 in the next section.
Individual Fans
FigureTag FD4-465-34

Figure 7-31. Color Change Stairway Fan Motor OFF


The following color change is used in Equation 3-8 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-35

Figure 7-32. Color Change Stairway Fan Motor ON

7-20
TSW (FSCS) Programming Examples, Continued

Programming for The following example shows typical programming for individual air flow indicator arrows.
Individual Air Flow Programming is similar for pressure control or indicator LEDs.
Indicator Arrows FigureTag FD4-465-36

Figure 7-33. Programming Individual Air Flow Indicator Arrows


The following color change is used in Equation 3-19 in the next section.
FigureTag FD4-465-37

Figure 7-34. Color Change for Stairwell Air Flow Indicator

7-21
4100ES Programming Example

Custom Control
Program: 3 Label: SMPL PROGRAM 3 – USER CUSTOM CONTROL
4100ES CC Equation Equation No. Label
Summary – Program 3 1 Set Normal Conditions at Startup
2 Set Normal Conditions at Reset
3 Report Trouble if Switches Not Reset
4 Initialize Normal Conditions at Reset
5 Smoke Control Initiate
6 Smoke Control Reset
7 Initiate Smoke Zone 1
8 Activate Smoke Control Zone 1
9 Initiate Smoke Zone 2
10 Activate Smoke Control Zone 2
11 Initiate Smoke Zone 3
12 Activate Smoke Control Zone 3
13 Initiate Smoke Zone 4
14 Activate Smoke Control Zone 4
15 Report Tbl if Supply Fan not ON
16 Report TBL if Supply Fan not OFF
17 Report TBL if Exhaust Fan not ON
18 Report TBL if Exhaust Fan not OFF
19 Report TBL if Stair Press Fan not ON
20 Report TBL if Stair Press Fan not OFF
21 Report TBL if Main Exh Damper not OPEN
22 Report TBL if Main Exh Damper not CLOSED
23 Report TBL if Main Sup Damper not OPEN
24 Report TBL if Main Sup Damper not CLOSED
25 Report TBL if Main Ret Damper not OPEN
26 Report TBL if Main Ret Damper not CLOSED
27 Report TBL if SUP Damper 1A not OPEN
28 Report TBL if SUP Damper 1A not CLOSED
29 Report TBL if SUP Damper 1B not OPEN
30 Report TBL if SUP Damper 1B not CLOSED
31 Report TBL if SUP Damper 2A not OPEN
32 Report TBL if SUP Damper 2A not CLOSED
33 Report TBL if SUP Damper 2B not OPEN
34 Report TBL if SUP Damper 2B not CLOSED
35 Report TBL if EXH Damper 1A not OPEN
36 Report TBL if EXH Damper 1A not CLOSED
37 Report TBL if EXH Damper 1B not OPEN
38 Report TBL if EXH Damper 1B not CLOSED
39 Report TBL if EXH Damper 2A not OPEN
40 Report TBL if EXH Damper 2A not CLOSED
41 Report TBL if EXH Damper 2B not OPEN
42 Report TBL if EXH Damper 2B not CLOSED
43 1st Flr Area A Pressurization Status Led
44 1st Flr Area A Exhaust Status Led
45 1st Flr Area A Fault Status Led
46 1st Flr Area B Pressurization Status Led
47 1st Flr Area B Exhaust Status Led
48 1st Flr Area B Fault Status Led
49 2nd Flr Area A Pressurization Status Led
50 2nd Flr Area A Exhaust Status Led
51 2nd Flr Area A Fault Status Led

Continued on next page

7-22
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

4100ES CC Equation Custom Control


Summary – Program 3 Program: 3 Label: SMPL PROGRAM 3 – USER CUSTOM CONTROL
Equation No. Label
52 2nd Flr Area B Pressurization Status Led
53 2nd Flr Area B Exhaust Status Led
54 2nd Flr Area B Fault Status Led
55 Manual Control Stair Pressurization Auto
56 Reset the pri to 9 for Stair Fan auto
57 Manual Control Stair Press Fan ON
58 Manual Control Stair Press Fan OFF
59 Stairwell Fan Automatic Status Led
60 Stairwell Fan ON Status Led
61 Stairwell Fan OFF Status Led
62 Manual Control Main Supply Fan Auto
63 Reset the pri to 9 for Main Supply auto
64 Manual Control Main Supply Fan ON
65 Manual Control Main Supply Fan OFF
66 Main Supply Automatic Status Led
67 Main Supply Fan ON Status Led
68 Main Supply Fan OFF Status Led
69 Manual Control Main Exhaust Fan Auto
70 Reset the pri to 9 for Main Exh auto
71 Manual Control Main Exh Fan ON
72 Manual Control Main Exh Fan OFF
73 Main Exhaust Automatic Status Led
74 Main Exhaust Fan ON Status Led
75 Main Exhaust Fan OFF Status Led
76 Manual Supply Damper Auto
77 Reset the pri to 9 for MainDamper auto
78 Manual Control MainSupply Damper ON
79 Manual Control Main Damper OFF
80 Main Supply Damper Automatic Status Led
81 Main Supply Damper ON Status Led
82 Main Supply Damper OFF Status Led
83 Manual Return Air Damper Auto
84 Reset the pri to 9 for Main Return auto
85 Manual Ctrl Main Return Air Damper OPEN
86 Manual Ctrl Main Return Air Damper CLOSE
87 Main Return Air Damper Automatic Status
88 Main Return Air Damper OPEN Status Led
89 Main Return Air Damper CLOSED Status Led
90 Manual Exhaust Damper Auto
91 Reset the pri to 9 for Exhaust Dam auto
92 Manual Ctrl Exhaust Air Damper OPEN
93 Manual Ctrl Exhaust Air Damper CLOSE
94 Main Return Air Damper Automatic Status
95 Exhaust Air Damper OPEN Status Led
96 Exhaust Air Damper Closed Status Led
97 Manual Control 1st Flr Area A Automatic
98 Automatic PRI9 1st Floor Area A
99 Manual Control 1st Flr Area A Pressurize
100 Manual Control 1st Flr Area A Exhaust
101 Manual Control 1st Flr Area B Automatic
102 Automatic PRI9 1st Floor Area B

Continued on next page

7-23
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

4100ES CC Equation Custom Control


Summary – Program 3 Program: 3 Label: SMPL PROGRAM 3 – USER CUSTOM CONTROL
Equation No. Label
103 Manual Control 1st Flr Area B Pressurize
104 Manual Control 1st Flr Area B Exhaust
105 Manual Control 2nd Flr Area A Automatic
106 Automatic PRI9 2nd Flr Area A
107 Manual Control 2nd Flr Area A Pressurize
108 Manual Control 2nd Flr Area A Exhaust
109 Manual Control 2nd Flr Area B Automatic
110 Automatic PRI9 2nd Flr Area B
111 Manual Control 2nd Flr Area B Pressurize
112 Manual Control 2nd Flr Area B Exhaust
113 Track on all AUTOMATIC
114 p533
115 All auto change relay to pri 2,9

3-1: Set Normal Conditions at Startup


Equation 3-1: Set [INPUTS]
Normal Conditions STATUS ON
at Startup A34 | ANALOG | TIMER | SYSTEM STARTUP PULSE TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-17-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-18-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-19-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-20-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-21-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-22-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P517 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SET UP NORMAL CONDITIONS AT STARTUP
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA B INITIATE

Continued on next page

7-24
4100ES Programming Example, Continued
Equation 3-1: Set
Normal Conditions
at Startup HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P546 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P547 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P548 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P549 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P594 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIRWELL AUTOMATIC STATUS
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P595 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN AIR RETURN DAMPER AUTOMATIC
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P544 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN AUTOMATIC
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P545 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION AUTOMATIC
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P543 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN AUTOMATIC
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P597 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER AUTOMATIC
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P596 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER AUTOMATIC
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P702 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL AUTO
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P705 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL AUTO
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P708 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SUPPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL AUTO
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P711 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL AUTO
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P714 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL AUTO
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P717 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL AUTO
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P720 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL AUTO
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P723 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | EXHAUST DAMPER 2B MANUAL AUTO
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-2: Set 3-2: Set Normal Conditions at Reset


Normal Conditions [INPUTS]
at Reset STATUS ON
A21 | ANALOG | TIMER | SYSTEM RESET PULSE TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P532 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SET UP NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
[END OUTPUTS]

7-25
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-3: Report Trouble if Switches not in Automatic


Equation 3-3: Report [INPUTS]
Trouble if Switches NOT STATUS ON
not in Automatic P578 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC STATUS
OR NOT STATUS ON
P587 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR ZONE B PRESSURE DAMPER AUTO
OR NOT STATUS ON
P580 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC STATUS
OR NOT STATUS ON
P581 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC STATUS
OR NOT STATUS ON
P594 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIRWELL AUTOMATIC STATUS
OR NOT STATUS ON
P543 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN AUTOMATIC
OR NOT STATUS ON
P544 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN AUTOMATIC
OR NOT STATUS ON
P689 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER AUTOMATIC
OR NOT STATUS ON
P595 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN AIR RETURN DAMPER AUTOMATIC
OR NOT STATUS ON
P596 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER AUTOMATIC
OR NOT STATUS ON
P586 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR ZONE A PRESSURE DAMPER AUTO
OR NOT STATUS ON
P590 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR ZONE A EXHAUST DAMPER AUTO
OR NOT STATUS ON
P588 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR ZONE A PRESSURE DAMPER AUTO
OR NOT STATUS ON
P591 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR ZONE B EXHAUST DAMPER AUTO
OR NOT STATUS ON
P588 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR ZONE A PRESSURE DAMPER AUTO
OR NOT STATUS ON
P592 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR ZONE A EXHAUST DAMPER AUTO
OR NOT STATUS ON
P589 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR ZONE B PRESSURE DAMPER AUTO
OR NOT STATUS ON
P593 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR ZONE B EXHAUST DAMPER AUTO
AND NOT STATUS ON
P532 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SET UP NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
[END OUTPUTS]

3-4: Initialize Normal Conditions at Reset


Equation 3-4:  
Initialize Normal INPUTS]
Conditions at Reset STATUS ON
P532 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SET UP NORMAL CONDITIONS AT RESET
AND NOT STATUS ON
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
AND NOT STATUS ON
3:P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 300 & 400
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P518 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL

Continued on next page

7-26
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-4:
Initialize Normal HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
Conditions at Reset P519 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P520 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P521 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P522 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 A RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P523 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 B RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P524 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 A RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P525 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 B RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P540 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P541 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P528 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P529 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P530 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P531 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P512 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL ALARM INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-17-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-18-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-19-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-20-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-21-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
M1-22-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY

Continued on next page

7-27
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-4:
Initialize Normal HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
Conditions at Reset M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-5: Smoke 3-5: Smoke Control Initiate


Control Initiate
 
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A0 | ANALOG | ANALOG | NUMBER OF SYSTEM FIRE ALARMS
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
PULSE CONSTANT 2
A258 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | 2 SEC TIMER FOR SMOKE CONTROL INITIATE
[END OUTPUTS]

3-6: Smoke Control Reset


Equation 3-6: Smoke  
Control Reset [INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A258 | ANALOG | TIMER | 2 SEC TIMER FOR SMOKE CONTROL INITIATE
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P518 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P519 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P520 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P521 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P522 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 A RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P523 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 B RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P524 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 A RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P525 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 B RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P540 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P541 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P528 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P529 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P530 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P531 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

7-28
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-7: Initiate Smoke Zone 1


Equation 3-7: Initiate  
Smoke Zone 1 [INPUTS]
STATUS FIRE
M1-1-0 | PHOTO | SMOKE | M1-1 1ST FLR SMOKE AREA A
AND NOT STATUS ON
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
AND NOT STATUS ON
3:P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 300 & 400
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=8,9
P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
3:P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 3RD FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 3RD FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 4TH FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 4TH FLR AREA B INITIATE
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-8: 3-8:Activate Smoke Control Zone 1


Activate Smoke
Control
 
INPUTS]
Zone 1
STATUS ON
P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA A INITIATE
AND STATUS ON
P549 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
DELAY CONSTANT 5
A259 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | 5 SEC TIMER DELAY FOR SMOKE ZONE 1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-17-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-18-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY

Continued on next page

7-29
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-8:
Activate Smoke HOLD ON PRI=9,9
Control M1-19-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
Zone 1 [END OUTPUTS]

3-9: Initiate Smoke Zone 2


Equation 3-9: Initiate  
Smoke Zone 2 INPUTS]
STATUS FIRE
M1-2-0 | PHOTO | SMOKE | M1-2 1ST FLR SMOKE AREA B
AND NOT STATUS ON
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
AND NOT STATUS ON
3:P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 300 & 400
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=8,9
P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
3:P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 3RD FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 3RD FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 4TH FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 4TH FLR AREA B INITIATE
[END OUTPUTS]

3-10: Activate Smoke Control Zone 2


Equation 3-10:  
Activate Smoke [INPUTS]
Control STATUS ON
Zone 2 P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA B INITIATE
AND STATUS ON
P548 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
DELAY CONSTANT 5
A260 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY

Continued on next page

7-30
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-10:
Activate Smoke HOLD ON PRI=9,9
Control M1-17-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
Zone 2 HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-18-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-20-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
[END OUTPUTS]

3-11: Initiate Smoke Zone 3


Equation 3-11: Initiate  
Smoke Zone 3 [INPUTS]
STATUS FIRE
M1-3-0 | PHOTO | SMOKE | M1-3 2ND FLR SMOKE AREA A
AND NOT STATUS ON
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
AND NOT STATUS ON
3:P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 300 & 400
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=8,9
P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
3:P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 3RD FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 3RD FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 4TH FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 4TH FLR AREA B INITIATE
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-12: 3-12: Activate Smoke Control Zone 3


Activate Smoke
Control
 
[INPUTS]
Zone 3
STATUS ON
P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA A INITIATE
AND STATUS ON
P547 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
DELAY CONSTANT 5
A261 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1

Continued on next page

7-31
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-12:
Activate Smoke HOLD ON PRI=9,9
Control M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
Zone 3 HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-17-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-18-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-21-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
3:M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 3RD FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
3:M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 3RD FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-13: Initiate 3-13: Initiate Smoke Zone 4


Smoke Zone 4
 
[INPUTS]
STATUS FIRE
M1-4-0 | PHOTO | SMOKE | M1-4 2ND FLR SMOKE AREA B
AND NOT STATUS ON
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
AND NOT STATUS ON
3:P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 300 & 400
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=8,9
P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 1ST FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=8,9
3:P513 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 3RD FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P514 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 3RD FLR AREA B INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P515 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 4TH FLR AREA A INITIATE
HOLD OFF PRI=7,9
3:P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 4TH FLR AREA B INITIATE
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-14: 3-14: Activate Smoke Control Zone 4


Activate Smoke
Control
 
INPUTS]
Zone 4
STATUS ON
P516 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | SMOKE CONTROL 2ND FLR AREA B INITIATE
AND STATUS ON
P546 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
DELAY CONSTANT 5
A263 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1

Continued on next page

7-32
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-14:
Activate Smoke HOLD ON PRI=9,9
Control M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
Zone 4 HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-17-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
M1-18-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
M1-22-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
3:M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 3RD FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
3:M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 3RD FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-15: 3-15: Report Trouble if Supply Fan not ON


Report Trouble if
Supply Fan not ON
 
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A264 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-10-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P540 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-16: 3-16: Report Trouble if Supply Fan not OFF


Report Trouble if
Supply Fan not OFF
 
[INPUTS]
NOT STATUS ON
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A265 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-10-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P540 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

7-33
4100ES Programming Example, Continued
Equation 3-17:
Report Trouble if
Exhaust Fan not ON 3-17: Report Trouble if Exhaust Fan not ON
 
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A266 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-11-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P541 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-18: 3-18: Report Trouble if Exhaust Fan not OFF


Report Trouble if
Exhaust Fan not
 
[INPUTS]
OFF
NOT STATUS ON
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A267 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-11-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P541 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-19: 3-19: Report Trouble if Stair Pressure Fan not ON


Report Trouble if
Stair Pressure Fan
 
[INPUTS]
not ON
STATUS ON
M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A268 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-9-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | STAIR PRESS FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-9-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P531 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-20: 3-20: Report Trouble if Stair Pressure Fan not OFF
Report Trouble if
Stair Pressure Fan
 
[INPUTS]
not OFF
NOT STATUS ON
M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A270 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-9-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | STAIR PRESS FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-9-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P531 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

7-34
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-21:
Report Trouble if
3-21: Report Trouble if Main Exhaust Damper not OPEN
Main Exhaust
Damper not OPEN  
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A269 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P530 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-22: 3-22: Report Trouble if Main Exhaust Damper not CLOSED
Report Trouble if
Main Exhaust
 
INPUTS]
Damper not
NOT STATUS ON
CLOSED M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A271 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-13-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P530 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-23: 3-23: Report Trouble if Main Supply Damper not OPEN
Report Trouble if
Main Supply Damper
 
[INPUTS]
not OPEN
STATUS ON
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A272 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P529 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-24: 3-24: Report Trouble if Main Supply Damper not CLOSED
Report Trouble if
Main Supply Damper
 
[INPUTS]
not CLOSED
NOT STATUS ON
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A273 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-12-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P529 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

7-35
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-25: Report Trouble if Main Return Damper not OPEN


 
Equation 3-25: [INPUTS]
Report Trouble if STATUS ON
Main Return Damper M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
not OPEN DELAY CONSTANT 10
A274 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-14-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-14-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P528 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-26: Report Trouble if Main Return Damper not CLOSED


Equation 3-26:  
Report Trouble if INPUTS]
Main Return Damper NOT STATUS ON
not CLOSED M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A275 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-14-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-14-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P528 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-27: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 1A not OPEN


Equation 3-27:  
Report Trouble if [INPUTS]
Supply Damper 1A STATUS ON
not OPEN M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A276 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-15-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P518 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-28: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 1A not CLOSED


Equation 3-28:  
Report Trouble if [INPUTS]
Supply Damper 1A NOT STATUS ON
not CLOSED M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A277 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-15-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P518 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

7-36
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-29: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 1B not OPEN


Equation 3-29:  
Report Trouble if [INPUTS]
Supply Damper 1B STATUS ON
not OPEN M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A278 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-16-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P519 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-30: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 1B not CLOSED


Equation 3-30:  
Report Trouble if [INPUTS]
Supply Damper 1B NOT STATUS ON
not CLOSED M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A279 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-16-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P519 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-31: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 2A not OPEN


Equation 3-31:  
Report Trouble if INPUTS]
Supply Damper 2A STATUS ON
not OPEN M1-17-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A280 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-17-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P520 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-32: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 2A not CLOSED


Equation 3-32:  
Report Trouble if [INPUTS]
Supply Damper 2A NOT STATUS ON
not CLOSED M1-17-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A281 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-17-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P520 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

7-37
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-33: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 2B not OPEN


Equation 3-33:  
Report Trouble if INPUTS]
Supply Damper 2B STATUS ON
not OPEN M1-18-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A282 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-18-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P521 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-34: Report Trouble if Supply Damper 2B not CLOSED


Equation 3-34:  
Report Trouble if INPUTS]
Supply Damper 2B NOT STATUS ON
not CLOSED M1-18-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A283 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-18-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P521 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-35: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 1A not OPEN


Equation 3-35:  
Report Trouble if [INPUTS]
Exhaust Damper 1A STATUS ON
not OPEN M1-19-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A284 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-19-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P522 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 A RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-36: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 1A not CLOSED


Equation 3-36:  
Report Trouble if [INPUTS]
Exhaust Damper 1A NOT STATUS ON
not CLOSED M1-19-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A285 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-19-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P522 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 A RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

7-38
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-37: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 1B not OPEN


Equation 3-37:  
Report Trouble if [INPUTS]
Exhaust Damper 1B STATUS ON
not OPEN M1-20-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A286 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-20-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P523 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 B RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-38: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 1B not Closed


Equation 3-38:  
Report Trouble if NOT STATUS ON
Exhaust Damper 1B M1-20-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
not Closed DELAY CONSTANT 10
A287 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-20-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P523 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 B RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-39: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 2A not OPEN


Equation 3-39:  
Report Trouble if INPUTS]
Exhaust Damper 2A STATUS ON
not OPEN M1-21-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A288 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-21-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P524 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 A RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-40: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 2A not CLOSED


Equation 3-40:  
Report Trouble if [INPUTS]
Exhaust Damper 2A NOT STATUS ON
not CLOSED M1-21-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A321 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-21-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P524 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 A RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

7-39
4100ES Programming Example, Continued
Equation 3-41:
Report Trouble if
Exhaust Damper 2B 3-41: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 2B not OPEN
not OPEN  
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
M1-22-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A290 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-22-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P525 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 B RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-42: Report Trouble if Exhaust Damper 2B not CLOSED


Equation 3-42:  
Report Trouble if [INPUTS]
Exhaust Damper 2B NOT STATUS ON
not CLOSED M1-22-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
DELAY CONSTANT 10
A289 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS RAWNORMAL
M1-22-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=9,9
P525 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 B RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
[END OUTPUTS]

3-43: 1st Floor Area A Pressurization Status Led


st
Equation 3-43: 1  
Floor Area A [INPUTS]
Pressurization STATUS RAWSHORT
Status Led M1-15-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-10-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P550 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A PRESSURE
[END OUTPUTS]

3-44: 1st Floor Area A Exhaust Status Led


st
Equation 3-44: 1  
Floor Area A [INPUTS]
Exhaust Status Led STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-19-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-11-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-14-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-14-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P551 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A EXHAUST
[END OUTPUTS]

7-40
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-45: 1st


Floor Area A Fault 3-45: 1st Floor Area A Fault Status Led
Status Led
 
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P522 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 A RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P528 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P530 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P531 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P540 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN SUPPLY FAN FAIL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P582 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A FAULT STATUS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-46: 1st Floor Area B Pressurization Status Led


st
Equation 3-46: 1  
Floor Area B INPUTS]
Pressurization STATUS RAWSHORT
Status Led M1-16-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-10-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P552 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B PRESSURE
[END OUTPUTS]

3-47: 1st Floor Area B Exhaust Status Led


st
Equation 3-47: 1  
Floor Area B [INPUTS]
Exhaust Status Led STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-20-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-11-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-14-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-14-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P553 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B EXHAUST
[END OUTPUTS]

7-41
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-48: 1st 3-48: 1st Floor Area B Fault Status Led
Floor Area B Fault  
Status Led
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P523 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 1 B RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P528 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P530 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P531 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P541 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P583 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA B FAULT STATUS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-49: 2nd Floor Area A Pressurization Status Led


Equation 3-49: 2nd  
Floor Area A [INPUTS]
Pressurization STATUS RAWSHORT
Status Led M1-17-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-10-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P554 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A PRESSURE
[END OUTPUTS]
nd
Equation 3-50: 2 3-50: 2nd Floor Area A Exhaust Status Led
Floor Area A
Exhaust Status Led
 
[INPUTS]
STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-21-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-11-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-14-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-14-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P555 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A EXHAUST
[END OUTPUTS]

7-42
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-51: 2nd


Floor Area A Fault 3-51: 2nd Floor Area A Fault Status Led
Status Led  
INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P524 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 A RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P528 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P530 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P531 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P541 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P584 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A FAULT STATUS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-52: 2nd Floor Area B Pressurization Status Led


nd
Equation 3-52: 2  
Floor Area B [INPUTS]
Pressurization STATUS RAWSHORT
Status Led M1-18-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-10-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P556 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B PRESSURE
[END OUTPUTS]
nd
Equation 3-53: 2 3-53: 2nd Floor Area B Exhaust Status Led
Floor Area B
Exhaust Status Led
 
[INPUTS]
STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-22-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-11-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
AND NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-14-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-14-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P557 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B EXHAUST
[END OUTPUTS]

7-43
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-54: 2nd


Floor Area B Fault 3-54: 2nd Floor Area B Fault Status Led
Status Led  
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P525 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FLR 2 B RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P528 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P530 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P531 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | STAIR PRESS FAN FAIL
OR STATUS ON
P541 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | MAIN EXHAUST FAN FAIL
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P585 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B FAULT STATUS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-55: Manual Control Stair Pressurization Auto


Equation 3--55:  
Manual Control Stair INPUTS]
Pressurization Auto STATUS ON
P545 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P687 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION FAN ON
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P688 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION FAN OFF
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A305 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-56: Reset 3-56: Reset the pri to 9 for Stair Fan Auto
the pri to 9 for Stair
Fan Auto
 
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A305 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-57: 3-57: Manual Control Stair Fan ON


Manual Control Stair
Fan ON
 
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P687 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION FAN ON
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P688 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION FAN OFF
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P545 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

7-44
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-58: Manual Control Stair Fan OFF


Equation 3-58:  
Manual Control Stair INPUTS]
Fan OFF STATUS ON
P688 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION FAN OFF
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=2,9
M1-9-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | STAIR PRESS FAN M1-9-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P545 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION AUTOMATIC
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P687 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION FAN ON
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-59: 3-59: Stairwell Fan Automatic Status Led


Stairwell Fan
Automatic Status
 
INPUTS]
Led
NOT STATUS ON
P688 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION FAN OFF
AND NOT STATUS ON
P687 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION FAN ON
AND STATUS ON
P545 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P594 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIRWELL AUTOMATIC STATUS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-60: Stairwell Fan ON Status Led


Equation 3-60:  
Stairwell Fan ON [INPUTS]
Status Led STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-9-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | STAIR PRESS FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-9-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P572 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION FAN ON
[END OUTPUTS]

3-61: Stairwell Fan OFF Status Led


Equation 3-61:  
Stairwell Fan OFF [INPUTS]
Status Led NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-9-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | STAIR PRESS FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-9-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P573 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | STAIR PRESSURIZATION OFF
[END OUTPUTS]

7-45
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-62: Manual Control Main Supply Fan Auto


Equation 3-62:  
Manual Control Main [INPUTS]
Supply Fan Auto STATUS ON
P544 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P575 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN MANUAL ON
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P574 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MANUAL SUPPLY FAN OFF
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A303 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

3-63: Reset the pri to 9 for Main Supply Fan Auto


Equation 3-63: Reset  
the pri to 9 for Main INPUTS]
Supply Fan Auto STATUS ON
A303 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
[END OUTPUTS]

3-64: Manual Control Main Supply Fan ON


Equation 3-64:  
Manual Control Main INPUTS]
Supply Fan ON STATUS ON
P575 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN MANUAL ON
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,10
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P574 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MANUAL SUPPLY FAN OFF
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P544 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-65: 3-65: Manual Control Main Supply Fan OFF


Manual Control Main
Supply Fan OFF
 
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P574 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MANUAL SUPPLY FAN OFF
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=2,10
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P575 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN MANUAL ON
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P544 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

7-46
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-66: Main Supply Automatic Status Led


Equation 3-66: Main  
Supply Automatic INPUTS]
Status Led NOT STATUS ON
P574 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MANUAL SUPPLY FAN OFF
AND NOT STATUS ON
P575 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN MANUAL ON
AND STATUS ON
P544 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P674 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

3-67: Main Supply Fan ON Status Led


Equation 3-67: Main  
Supply Fan ON [INPUTS]
Status Led STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-10-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P675 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN ON
[END OUTPUTS]

3-68: Main Supply Fan OFF Status Led


Equation 3-68: Main  
Supply Fan OFF INPUTS]
Status Led NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-10-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P676 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY FAN OFF
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-69: 3-69: Manual Control Main Exhaust Fan Auto


Manual Control Main
Exhaust Fan Auto
 
INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P543 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P576 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN MANUAL ON
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P577 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN MANUAL OFF
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A304 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

7-47
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-70: Reset the pri to 9 for Main Exhaust Fan Auto


Equation 3-70: Reset  
the pri to 9 for Main [INPUTS]
Exhaust Fan Auto STATUS ON
A304 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
[END OUTPUTS]

3-71: Manual Control Main Exhaust Fan ON


Equation 3-71:  
Manual Control Main [INPUTS]
Exhaust Fan ON STATUS ON
P576 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN MANUAL ON
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,10
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P577 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN MANUAL OFF
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P543 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

3-72: Manual Control Main Exhaust Fan OFF


Equation 3-72:  
Manual Control Main INPUTS]
Exhaust Fan OFF STATUS ON
P577 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN MANUAL OFF
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=2,10
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P576 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN MANUAL ON
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P543 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

Equation 3-73: Main 3-73: Main Exhaust Fan Automatic Status Led
Exhaust Fan
Automatic Status
 
[INPUTS]
Led
NOT STATUS ON
P576 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN MANUAL ON
AND NOT STATUS ON
P577 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN MANUAL OFF
AND STATUS ON
P543 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P677 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

7-48
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-74: Main Exhaust Fan ON Status Led


Equation 3-74: Main  
Exhaust Fan ON INPUTS]
Status Led STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-11-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P678 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN ON
[END OUTPUTS]

3-75: Main Exhaust Fan OFF Status Led


Equation 3-75: Main  
Exhaust Fan OFF INPUTS]
Status Led NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-11-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P679 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST FAN OFF
[END OUTPUTS]

3-76: Main Supply Damper Auto


Equation 3-76: Main  
Supply Damper Auto [INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P597 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P566 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P567 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER CLOSED
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A306 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

3-77: Reset the pri to 9 for Main Supply Damper Auto


Equation 3-77: Reset  
the pri to 9 for Main INPUTS]
Supply Damper Auto STATUS ON
A306 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
[END OUTPUTS]

7-49
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-78:
Manual Control Main 3-78: Manual Control Main Supply Damper OPEN
Supply Damper
 
OPEN
INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P566 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER OPEN
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,10
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P567 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P597 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

3-79: Manual Control Main Supply Damper CLOSED


Equation 3-79:  
Manual Control Main INPUTS]
Supply Damper STATUS ON
CLOSED P567 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER CLOSED
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=2,10
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P566 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P597 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

3-80: Main Supply Damper Automatic Status Led


Equation 3-80: Main  
Supply Damper [INPUTS]
Automatic Status NOT STATUS ON
Led P566 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P567 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P597 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P689 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

3-81: Main Supply Damper OPEN Status Led


Equation 3-81: Main  
Supply Damper [INPUTS]
OPEN Status Led STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P690 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER OPEN
[END OUTPUTS]

7-50
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-82: Main


Supply Damper 3-82: Main Supply Damper CLOSED Status Led
CLOSED Status Led
 
[INPUTS]
NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P691 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN SUPPLY DAMPER CLOSED
[END OUTPUTS]

3-83: Manual Return Air Damper Auto


Equation 3-83:  
Manual Return Air INPUTS]
Damper Auto STATUS ON
P595 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN AIR RETURN DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P568 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN DAMPER OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P569 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN DAMPER CLOSED
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A307 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

3-84: Reset the pri to 9 for Main Return Damper Auto


Equation 3-84: Reset  
the pri to 9 for Main [INPUTS]
Return Damper Auto STATUS ON
A307 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
[END OUTPUTS]

3-85: Manual Control Main Return Air Damper OPEN


Equation 3-85:  
Manual Control Main [INPUTS]
Return Air Damper STATUS ON
OPEN P568 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN DAMPER OPEN
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,10
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P569 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN DAMPER CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P595 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN AIR RETURN DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

3-86: Manual Control Main Return Air Damper CLOSED


Equation 3-86:  
Manual Control Main [INPUTS]
Return Air Damper STATUS ON
CLOSED P569 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN DAMPER CLOSED
[END INPUTS]

Continued on next page

7-51
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-86:
Manual Control Main [OUTPUTS]
Return Air Damper HOLD OFF PRI=2,10
CLOSED M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P568 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN DAMPER OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P595 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN AIR RETURN DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

3-87: Main Return Air Damper Automatic Status Led


Equation 3-87: Main  
Return Air Damper INPUTS]
Automatic Status NOT STATUS ON
Led P568 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN DAMPER OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P569 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN DAMPER CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P595 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN AIR RETURN DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P680 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

3-88: Main Return Air Damper Open Status Led


Equation 3-88: Main  
Return Air Damper INPUTS]
Open Status Led STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-14-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-14-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P681 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER OPEN
[END OUTPUTS]

3-89: Main Return Air Damper CLOSED Status Led


Equation 3-89: Main  
Return Air Damper INPUTS]
CLOSED Status Led NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-14-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-14-2
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P682 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER CLOSED
[END OUTPUTS]

3-90: Manual Control Exhaust Air Damper Auto


Equation 3-90:  
Manual Control [INPUTS]
Exhaust Air Damper STATUS ON
Auto P596 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P571 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P570 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER OPEN
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A308 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

7-52
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-91: Reset


the pri to 9 for Main 3-91: Reset the pri to 9 for Main Exhaust Damper Auto
Exhaust Damper INPUTS]
Auto STATUS ON
A308 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
[END OUTPUTS]

3-92: Manual Control Exhaust Air Damper OPEN


Equation 3-92:  
Manual Control [INPUTS]
Exhaust Air Damper STATUS ON
OPEN P570 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER OPEN
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,10
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P571 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P596 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

3-93: Manual Control Exhaust Air Damper CLOSED


Equation 3-93:  
Manual Control [INPUTS]
Exhaust Air Damper STATUS ON
CLOSED P571 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER CLOSED
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=2,10
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P570 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P596 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

3-94: Main Exhaust Air Damper Automatic Status


Equation 3-94: Main  
Exhaust Air Damper [INPUTS]
Automatic Status NOT STATUS ON
P570 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P571 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P596 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P683 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER AUTOMATIC
[END OUTPUTS]

7-53
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

3-95: Main Exhaust Air Damper OPEN Status


Equation 3-95: Main  
Exhaust Air Damper [INPUTS]
OPEN Status STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P684 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER OPEN
[END OUTPUTS]

3-96: Main Exhaust Air Damper CLOSED Status


Equation 3-96: Main  
Exhaust Air Damper INPUTS]
CLOSED Status NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2 | MTSENSE | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P685 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER CLOSED
[END OUTPUTS]

3-97: Manual control 1st Floor Area A Automatic


Equation 3-97:  
st
Manual control 1 INPUTS]
Floor Area A STATUS ON
Automatic P549 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P558 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A MANUAL PRESSURIZE
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P559 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A MANUAL EXHAUST
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A309 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

3-98: Automatic Pri 9


Equation 3-98:  
Automatic Pri 9 [INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A309 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS ON
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
AND NOT STATUS ON
3:P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 300 & 400
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-99: Manual control 1st Floor Area A Pressurize


Equation 3-99:  
st
Manual control 1 INPUTS]
Floor Area A STATUS ON
Pressurize P558 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A MANUAL PRESSURIZE
[END INPUTS]

Continued on next page

7-54
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
Equation 3-99: M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
st
Manual control 1 HOLD ON PRI=2,9
Floor Area A M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
Pressurize HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-19-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P578 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC STATUS
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P549 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P559 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A MANUAL EXHAUST
HOLD PRI PRI=2,2
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-100: Manual control 1st Floor Area A Exhaust


Equation 3-100:  
st
Manual control 1 [INPUTS]
Floor Area A STATUS ON
Exhaust P559 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A MANUAL EXHAUST
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-15-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-19-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P578 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC STATUS
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P549 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P558 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR A MANUAL PRESSURIZE
HOLD PRI PRI=2,2
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-101: Manual control 1st Floor Area B Automatic


Equation 3-101:  
st
Manual control 1 INPUTS]
Floor Area B STATUS ON
Automatic P548 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]

Continued on next page

7-55
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-101:
st
Manual control 1 [OUTPUTS]
Floor Area B HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
Automatic P560 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B MANUAL PRESSURIZE
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P561 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B MANUAL EXHAUST
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A310 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

3-102: Automatic Pri 9


Equation 3-102:  
Automatic Pri 9 [INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A310 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS ON
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
AND NOT STATUS ON
3:P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 300 & 400
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-103: Manual control 1st Floor Area B Pressurize


Equation 3-103:  
st
Manual control 1 INPUTS]
Floor Area B STATUS ON
Pressurize P560 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B MANUAL PRESSURIZE
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-20-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P579 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC STATUS
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P548 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P561 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B MANUAL EXHAUST
HOLD PRI PRI=2,2
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-104: Manual control 1st Floor Area B Exhaust


Equation 3-104:  
st
Manual control 1 [INPUTS]
Floor Area B STATUS ON
Exhaust P561 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B MANUAL EXHAUST
[END INPUTS]

Continued on next page

7-56
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
Equation 3-104: M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
st
Manual control 1 HOLD ON PRI=2,9
Floor Area B M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
Exhaust HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-20-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-16-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P579 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC STATUS
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P548 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P560 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR B MANUAL PRESSURIZE
HOLD PRI PRI=2,2
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-105: Manual control 2nd Floor Area A Automatic


Equation 3-105:  
nd
Manual control 2 [INPUTS]
Floor Area A STATUS ON
Automatic P547 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P562 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A MAUAL PRESSURIZE
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P563 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A MANUAL EXHAUST
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A311 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

3-106: Automatic Pri 9


Equation 3-106:  
Automatic Pri 9 INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A311 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS ON
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
AND NOT STATUS ON
3:P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 300 & 400
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-107: Manual control 2nd Floor Area A Pressurize


Equation 3-107:  
nd
Manual control 2 [INPUTS]
Floor Area A STATUS ON
Pressurize P562 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A MAUAL PRESSURIZE
[END INPUTS]

Continued on next page

7-57
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-107:
nd [OUTPUTS]
Manual control 2
Floor Area A HOLD ON PRI=2,9
Pressurize M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-17-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-21-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P580 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC STATUS
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P547 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P563 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A MANUAL EXHAUST
HOLD PRI PRI=2,2
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-108: Manual control 2nd Floor Area A Exhaust


Equation 3-108:  
nd
Manual control 2 [INPUTS]
Floor Area A STATUS ON
Exhaust P563 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A MANUAL EXHAUST
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-17-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-21-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P580 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC STATUS
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P547 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P562 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR A MAUAL PRESSURIZE
HOLD PRI PRI=2,2
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-109: Manual control 2nd Floor Area B Automatic


Equation 3-109:  
nd
Manual control 2 [INPUTS]
Floor Area B STATUS ON
Automatic P546 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]

Continued on next page

7-58
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-109: [OUTPUTS]


Manual control 2
nd HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
Floor Area B P564 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B MANUAL PRESSURIZE
Automatic HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P565 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B MANUAL EXHAUST
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A312 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

3-110: Automatic Pri 9


Equation 3-110:  
Automatic Pri 9 [INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A312 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
AND NOT STATUS ON
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
AND NOT STATUS ON
3:P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 300 & 400
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-111: Manual control 2nd Floor Area B Pressurize


Equation 3-111:  
nd
Manual control 2 INPUTS]
Floor Area B STATUS ON
Pressurize P564 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B MANUAL PRESSURIZE
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-10-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | SUPPLY FAN RELAY M1-10-1
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-18-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-22-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P581 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC STATUS
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P546 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P565 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B MANUAL EXHAUST
HOLD PRI PRI=2,2
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-112: Manual control 2nd Floor Area B Exhaust


Equation 3-112:  
nd
Manual control 2 INPUTS]
Floor Area B STATUS ON
Exhaust P565 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B MANUAL EXHAUST
[END INPUTS]

Continued on next page

7-59
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-112:
nd
Manual control 2 [OUTPUTS]
Floor Area B HOLD ON PRI=2,9
Exhaust M1-11-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | EXHAUST FAN RELAY M1-11-1
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-13-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-13-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-14-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-14-1
HOLD ON PRI=2,9
M1-22-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-12-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER RELAY M1-12-1
HOLD OFF PRI=3,9
M1-18-1 | MRELAY | CPRESS | 2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P581 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC STATUS
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P546 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P564 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR B MANUAL PRESSURIZE
HOLD PRI PRI=2,2
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-113: Track ALL Automatic


Equation 3-113:  
Track ALL INPUTS]
Automatic STATUS ON
P546 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
AND STATUS ON
P547 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
AND STATUS ON
P548 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC
AND STATUS ON
P549 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P578 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC STATUS
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P579 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 1ST FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC STATUS
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P580 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA A AUTOMATIC STATUS
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P581 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | 2ND FLR AREA B AUTOMATIC STATUS
[END OUTPUTS]

3-114: P533
Equation 3-114:  
P533 [INPUTS]
NOT STATUS ON
P533 | DIGITAL | TROUBLE | FSCS SW'S NOT RESET AT TSW LVL 100 & 200
DELAY CONSTANT 2
A314 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A315 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END OUTPUTS]

7-60
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 3-115: All


auto change to Pri 3-115: All auto change to Pri 2,9
2,9  
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A315 | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
L256 | LIST | CONTROL | LEVEL 100 AND 200 RELAYS
[END OUTPUTS]

4100ES CC Equation Custom Control


Summary – Program: 4 Label: SMPL PROGRAM 4 – USER CUSTOM CONTROL
Program 4 Equation No. Label
1 Pressurization Indication On 1st Flr A
2 Pressurization Indication On 1st Flr B
3 Pressurization Indication On 2nd Flr A
4 Pressurization Indication On 2nd Flr B
5 Exhaust Indication On 1st Flr A
6 Exhaust Indication On 1st Flr B
7 Exhaust Indication On 2nd Flr A
8 Exhaust Indication On 2nd Flr B

Equation 1:
Pressurization Equation: 1 Label: Pressurization Indication On 1st Flr A
st
Indication On 1 COMMENTS:
Flr A INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-10-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-15-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P600|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR ZONE A PRESSURIZATION FAN ON
END:

Equation: 2 Label: Pressurization Indication On 1st Flr B


Equation 2: COMMENTS:
Pressurization
st
INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
Indication On 1 M1-10-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
Flr B AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-16-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P601|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR ZONE B PRESSURIZATION FAN ON
END:

7-61
4100ES Programming Example, Continued
Equation 3:
Pressurization
Indication On 2
nd Equation: 3 Label: Pressurization Indication On 2nd Flr A
Flr A COMMENTS:
INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-10-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-17-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P602|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR ZONE A PRESSURIZATION FAN ON
END:

Equation: 4 Label: Pressurization Indication On 2nd Flr B


Equation 4: COMMENTS:
Pressurization
nd
INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
Indication On 2 M1-10-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|SUPPLY FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-10-2
Flr B AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-12-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|MAIN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-12-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-18-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P603|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR ZONE B PRESSURIZATION FAN ON
END:

Equation: 5 Label: Exhaust Indication On 1st Flr A


Equation 5: COMMENTS:
Exhaust
st
INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
Indication On 1 M1-11-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
Flr A AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-19-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P604|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR ZONE A EXHAUST FAN ON
END:

Equation: 6 Label: Exhaust Indication On 1st Flr B


Equation 6: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
st
Indication On 1 M1-11-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
Flr B AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-20-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P605|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR ZONE B EXHAUST FAN ON
END:

7-62
4100ES Programming Example, Continued
Equation 7: Exhaust
nd
Indication On 2
Flr A
Equation: 7 Label: Exhaust Indication on 2nd Flr A
COMMENTS:
INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-11-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-21-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P606|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR ZONE A EXHAUST FAN ON
END:

Equation: 8 Label: Exhaust Indication on 2nd Flr B


Equation 8: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
Indication On M1-11-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|EXHAUST FAN RUNNING MONITOR M1-11-2
nd
2 Flr B AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-13-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|MAIN EXHAUST AIR DAMPER MONITOR M1-13-1
AND STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-22-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P607|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR ZONE B EXHAUST FAN ON
END:

Custom Control
4100ES CC Equation Program: 5 Label: SMPL PROGRAM 5 – USER CUSTOM CONTROL
Summary – Equation No. Label
Program 5 1 Supply Damper 1A Open Status
2 Supply Damper 1A Closed Status
3 Exhaust Damper 1A Open Status
4 Exhaust Fan Damper 1A Closed Status
5 Supply Damper 1B Open Status
6 Supply Damper 1B Closed Status
7 Exhaust Damper 1B Open Status
8 Exhaust Fan Damper 1B Closed Status
9 Supply Damper 2A Open Status
10 Supply Damper 2A Closed Status
11 Exhaust Damper 2A Open Status
12 Exhaust Fan Damper 2A Closed Status
13 Supply Damper 2B Open Status
14 Supply Damper 2B Closed Status
15 Exhaust Damper 2B Open Status
16 Exhaust Fan Damper 2B Closed Status
17 Supply Damper 1A Manual Automatic
18 Reset the pri to 9 for supply 1A auto
19 Supply Damper 1A Manual Open
20 Supply Damper 1A Manual Close
21 Supply Damper 1A Automatic Status
22 Supply Damper 1B Manual Automatic
23 Reset the pri to 9 for supply 1B auto

Continued on next page

7-63
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

4100ES CC Equation
Summary – Custom Control
Program 5 Program: 5 Label: SMPL PROGRAM 5 – USER CUSTOM CONTROL
Equation No. Label
24 Supply Damper 1B Manual Open
25 Supply Damper 1B Manual Close
26 Supply Damper 1B Automatic Status
27 Exhaust Damper 1A Manual Automatic
28 Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 1A auto
29 Exhaust Damper 1A Manual Open
30 Exhaust Damper 1A Manual Close
31 Exhaust Damper 1A Automatic Status
32 Supply Damper 2A Manual Automatic
33 Reset the pri to 9 for supply 2A auto
34 Supply Damper 2A Manual Open
35 Supply Damper 2A Manual Close
36 Supply Damper 2A Automatic Status
37 Supply Damper 2B Manual Automatic
38 Reset the pri to 9 for supply 2B auto
39 Supply Damper 2B Manual Open
40 Supply Damper 2B Manual Close
41 Supply Damper 2B Automatic Status
42 Exhaust Damper 1B Manual Automatic
43 Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 1B auto
44 Exhaust Damper 1B Manual Open
45 Exhaust Damper 1B Manual Close
46 Exhaust Damper 1B Automatic Status
47 Exhaust Damper 2A Manual Automatic
48 Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 2A auto
49 Exhaust Damper 2A Manual Open
50 Exhaust Damper 2A Manual Close
51 Exhaust Damper 2A Automatic Status
52 Exhaust Damper 2B Manual Automatic
53 Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 2B auto
54 Exhaust Damper 2B Manual Open
55 Exhaust Damper 2B Manual Close
56 Exhaust Damper 2B Automatic Status

Equation 1: Supply Equation: 1 Label: Supply Damper 1A Open Status


Damper 1A Open COMMENTS:
Status INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-15-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P651|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL1 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER OPEN
END:

Equation: 2 Label: Supply Damper 1A Closed Status


Equation 2: COMMENTS:
Supply Damper INPUTS: NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
1A Closed M1-15-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
Status OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P652|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL1 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER CLOSED
END:

7-64
4100ES Programming Example, Continued
Equation 3: Exhaust
Damper 1A Open
Status
Equation: 3 Label: Exhaust Damper 1A Open Status
COMMENTS:
INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
M1-19-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P663|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL1 A EXHAUST AIR DAMPER OPEN
END:

Equation: 4 Label: Exhaust Fan Damper 1A Closed Status


Equation 4: COMMENTS:
Exhaust Fan INPUTS: NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
Damper 1A M1-19-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
Closed Status OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P664|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL1 A EXHAUST AIR DAMPER CLOSED
END:

Equation: 5 Label: Supply Damper 1B Open Status


Equation 5: COMMENTS:
Supply Damper INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
1B Open Status M1-16-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P654|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL1 B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER OPEN
END:

Equation: 6 Label: Supply Damper 1B Closed Status


Equation 6: COMMENTS:
Supply Damper INPUTS: NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
1B Closed M1-16-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
Status OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P655|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL1 B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER CLOSED
END:

Equation: 7 Label: Exhaust Damper 1B Open Status


Equation 7: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
Damper 1B M1-20-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
Open Status OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P666|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL1 B EXHAUST AIR DAMPER OPEN
END:

Equation: 8 Label: Exhaust Fan Damper 1B Closed Status


Equation 8: COMMENTS:
Exhaust Fan INPUTS: NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
Damper 1B M1-20-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
Closed Status OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P667|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL1 B EXHAUST AIR DAMPER CLOSED
END:

Equation: 9 Label: Supply Damper 2A Open Status


Equation 9: COMMENTS:
Supply Damper INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
2A Open Status M1-17-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P657|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL2 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER OPEN
END:

7-65
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation: 10 Label: Supply Damper 2A Closed Status


COMMENTS:
Equation 10: INPUTS: NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
Supply Damper M1-17-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
2A Closed OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
Status P658|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL2 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER CLOSED
END:

Equation: 11 Label: Exhaust Damper 2A Open Status


Equation 11: COMMENTS:
Exhaust Damper INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
2A Open Status M1-21-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P669|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL2 A EXHAUST AIR DAMPER OPEN
END:

Equation: 12 Label: Exhaust Fan Damper 2A Closed Status


Equation 12: COMMENTS:
Exhaust Fan INPUTS: NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
Damper 2A M1-21-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
Closed Status OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P670|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL2 A EXHAUST AIR DAMPER CLOSED
END:

Equation: 13 Label: Supply Damper 2B Open Status


Equation 13: COMMENTS:
Supply Damper INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
2B Open Status M1-18-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P660|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL2 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER OPEN
END:

Equation: 14 Label: Supply Damper 2B Closed Status


Equation 14: COMMENTS:
Supply INPUTS: Not STATUS RAWSHORT
Damper 2B M1-18-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER MONITOR
Closed Status OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P661|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL2 A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER CLOSED
END:

Equation: 15 Label: Exhaust Damper 2B Open Status


Equation 15: COMMENTS:
Exhaust Damper INPUTS: STATUS RAWSHORT
2B Open Status M1-22-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P672|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL2 A EXHAUST AIR DAMPER OPEN
END:

Equation: 16 Label: Exhaust Fan Damper 2B Closed Status


Equation 16: COMMENTS:
Exhaust Fan INPUTS: NOT STATUS RAWSHORT
Damper 2B M1-22-2|MTSENSE|UTILITY|2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER MONITOR
Closed Status OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P673|DIGITAL|UTILITY|FL2 A EXHAUST AIR DAMPER CLOSED
END:

7-66
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation: 17 Label: Supply Damper 1A Manual Automatic


Equation 17: COMMENTS:
Supply Damper INPUTS: STATUS ON
1A Manual P702|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL AUTO
Automatic OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P701|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL CLOSED
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A295|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
END:

Equation: 18 Label: Reset the pri to 9 for supply 1A auto


Equation 18: COMMENTS:
Reset the pri to INPUTS: STATUS ON
9 for supply 1A A295|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
auto OUTPUTS: HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-15-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
END:

Equation: 19 Label: Supply Damper 1A Manual Open


Equation 19: COMMENTS:
Supply Damper INPUTS: STATUS ON
1A Manual P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL OPEN
Open OUTPUTS: HOLD ON PRI=2,2
M1-15-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P701|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P702|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL AUTO
END:

Equation: 20 Label: Supply Damper 1A Manual Close


Equation 20: COMMENTS:
Supply Damper INPUTS: STATUS ON
1A Manual P701|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL CLOSED
Close OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=2,2
M1-15-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P702|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL AUTO
END:

Equation: 21 Label: Supply Damper 1A Automatic Status


Equation 21: COMMENTS:
Supply Damper INPUTS: NOT STATUS ON
1A Automatic P558|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR A MANUAL PRESSURIZE
Status AND NOT STATUS ON
P700|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P701|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P702|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1A MANUAL AUTO
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P586|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR ZONE A PRESSURE DAMPER AUTO
END:

7-67
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation: 22 Label: Supply Damper 1B Manual Automatic


Equation 22: COMMENTS:
Supply INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 1B P708|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL AUTO
Manual OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
Automatic
P706|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P707|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL CLOSED
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A296|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
END:

Equation: 23 Label: Reset the pri to 9 for supply 1B auto


Equation 23: COMMENTS:
Reset the pri to INPUTS: STATUS ON
9 for supply 1B A296|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
auto OUTPUTS: HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-16-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
END:

Equation: 24 Label: Supply Damper 1B Manual Open


Equation 24: COMMENTS:
Supply INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 1B P706|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL OPEN
Manual Open OUTPUTS: HOLD ON PRI=2,2
M1-16-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P708|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL AUTO
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P707|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL CLOSED
END:

Equation: 25 Label: Supply Damper 1B Manual Close


Equation 25: COMMENTS:
Supply INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 1B P707|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL CLOSED
Manual Close OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=2,2
M1-16-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P708|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL AUTO
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P706|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL OPEN
END:

Equation: 26 Label: Supply Damper 1B Automatic Status


Equation 26: COMMENTS:
Supply INPUTS: NOT STATUS ON
Damper 1B P560|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR B MANUAL PRESSURIZE
Automatic AND NOT STATUS ON
Status P706|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P707|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P708|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 1B MANUAL AUTO
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P587|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR ZONE B PRESSURE DAMPER AUTO
END:

7-68
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation: 27 Label: Exhaust Damper 1A Manual Automatic


Equation 27: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 1A P705|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL AUTO
Manual OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
Automatic P703|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P704|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL CLOSED
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A296|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
END:

Equation: 28 Label: Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 1A auto


Equation 28: COMMENTS:
Reset the pri to INPUTS: STATUS ON
9 for exhaust A297|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
1A auto OUTPUTS: HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-19-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
END:

Equation: 29 Label: Exhaust Damper 1A Manual Open


Equation 29: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 1A P703|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL OPEN
Manual Open OUTPUTS: HOLD ON PRI=2,2
M1-19-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P704|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P705|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL AUTO
END:

Equation: 30 Label: Exhaust Damper 1A Manual Close


Equation 30: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 1A P704|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL CLOSED
Manual Close OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=2,2
M1-19-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P703|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P705|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL AUTO
END:

Equation: 31 Label: Exhaust Damper 1A Automatic Status


Equation 31: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: NOT STATUS ON
Damper 1A P559|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR A MANUAL EXHAUST
Automatic AND NOT STATUS ON
Status
P703|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P704|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P705|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1A MANUAL AUTO
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P590|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR ZONE A EXHAUST DAMPER AUTO
END:

7-69
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation: 32 Label: Supply Damper 2A Manual Automatic

COMMENTS:
Equation 32: INPUTS: STATUS ON
Supply Damper P714|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL AUTO
2A Manual OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
Automatic P712|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P713|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A298|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
END:

Equation: 33 Label: Reset the pri to 9 for supply 2A auto


Equation 33: COMMENTS:
Reset the pri to INPUTS: STATUS ON
9 for supply 2A A298|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
auto OUTPUTS: HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-17-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
END:

Equation: 34 Label: Supply Damper 2A Manual Open


Equation 34: COMMENTS:
Supply INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 2A P712|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL OPEN
Manual Open OUTPUTS: HOLD ON PRI=2,2
M1-17-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P713|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P714|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL AUTO
END:

Equation: 35 Label: Supply Damper 2A Manual Close


Equation 35: COMMENTS:
Supply INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 2A P713|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
Manual Close OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=2,2
M1-17-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR A SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P712|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P714|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL AUTO
END:

7-70
4100ES Programming Example, Continued
Equation 36: Supply
Damper 2A
Automatic Status Equation: 36 Label: Supply Damper 2A Automatic Status
COMMENTS:
INPUTS: NOT STATUS ON
P562|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR A MAUAL PRESSURIZE
AND NOT STATUS ON
P712|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P713|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P714|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2A MANUAL AUTO
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P588|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR ZONE A PRESSURE DAMPER AUTO
END:

Equation: 37 Label: Supply Damper 2B Manual Automatic


Equation 37: COMMENTS:
Supply INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 2B P720|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL AUTO
Manual OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
Automatic P718|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P719|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL CLOSED
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A299|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
END:

Equation: 38 Label: Reset the pri to 9 for supply 2B auto


Equation 38: COMMENTS:
Reset the pri to INPUTS: STATUS ON
9 for supply 2B A299|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
auto OUTPUTS: HOLD PRI PRI=9,9
M1-18-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
END:

Equation: 39 Label: Supply Damper 2B Manual Open


Equation 39: COMMENTS:
Supply INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 2B P718|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL OPEN
Manual Open OUTPUTS: HOLD ON PRI=2,2
M1-18-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P719|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P720|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL AUTO
END:

Equation: 40 Label: Supply Damper 2B Manual Close


Equation 40: COMMENTS:
Supply Damper INPUTS: STATUS ON
2B Manual P719|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL CLOSED
Close OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=2,2
M1-18-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR B SUPPLY AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P718|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P720|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL AUTO
END:

7-71
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation: 41 Label: Supply Damper 2B Automatic Status


Equation 41: COMMENTS:
Supply INPUTS: NOT STATUS ON
Damper 2B P564|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR B MANUAL PRESSURIZE
Automatic AND NOT STATUS ON
Status
P718|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P719|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P720|DIGITAL|UTILITY|SUPPLY DAMPER 2B MANUAL AUTO
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P589|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR ZONE B PRESSURE DAMPER AUTO
END:

Equation: 42 Label: Exhaust Damper 1B Manual Automatic


Equation 42: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 1B P711|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL AUTO
Manual OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
Automatic P710|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P709|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL OPEN
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A300|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
END:

Equation: 43 Label: Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 1B auto


Equation 43: COMMENTS:
Reset the pri INPUTS: STATUS ON
to 9 for A300|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
exhaust 1B OUTPUTS: HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
auto M1-20-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
END:

Equation: 44 Label: Exhaust Damper 1B Manual Open


Equation 44: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 1B P709|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL OPEN
Manual Open OUTPUTS: HOLD ON PRI=2,2
M1-20-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P710|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P711|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL AUTO
END:

Equation: 45 Label: Exhaust Damper 1B Manual Close


Equation 45: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 1B P710|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL CLOSED
Manual Close OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=2,2
M1-20-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|1ST FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P711|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL AUTO
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P709|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL OPEN
END:

7-72
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation: 46 Label: Exhaust Damper 1B Automatic Status


Equation 46: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: NOT STATUS ON
Damper 1B P561|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR B MANUAL EXHAUST
Automatic AND NOT STATUS ON
Status
P709|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P710|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P711|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 1B MANUAL AUTO
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P591|DIGITAL|UTILITY|1ST FLR ZONE B EXHAUST DAMPER AUTO
END:

Equation: 47 Label: Exhaust Damper 2A Manual Automatic


Equation 47: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 2A P717|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL AUTO
Manual OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
Automatic P715|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P716|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A301|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
END:

Equation: 48 Label: Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 2A auto


Equation 48: COMMENTS:
Reset the pri to INPUTS: STATUS ON
9 for exhaust A301|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
2A auto OUTPUTS: HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
M1-21-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
END:

Equation: 49 Label: Exhaust Damper 2A Manual Open


Equation 49: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 2A P715|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL OPEN
Manual Open OUTPUTS: HOLD ON PRI=2,2
M1-21-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P716|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P717|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL AUTO
END:

Equation: 50 Label: Exhaust Damper 2A Manual Close


Equation 50: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 2A P716|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
Manual Close OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=2,2
M1-21-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR A RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P715|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P717|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL AUTO
END:

7-73
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation: 51 Label: Exhaust Damper 2A Automatic Status


Equation 51: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: NOT STATUS ON
Damper 2A P563|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR A MANUAL EXHAUST
Automatic AND NOT STATUS ON
Status
P715|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P716|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P717|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL AUTO
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P592|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR ZONE A EXHAUST DAMPER AUTO
END:

Equation: 52 Label: Exhaust Damper 2B Manual Automatic


Equation 52: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 2B P723|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2B MANUAL AUTO
Manual OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
Automatic P721|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2B MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P722|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
PULSE CONSTANT 0
A302|Analog Timer|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
END:

Equation: 53 Label: Reset the pri to 9 for exhaust 2B auto


Equation 53: COMMENTS:
Reset the pri INPUTS: STATUS ON
to 9 for A302|ANALOG|TIMER|CUSTOM CONTROL – TIMER
exhaust 2B OUTPUTS: HOLD PRI PRI=2,9
auto M1-22-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
END:

Equation: 54 Label: Exhaust Damper 2B Manual Open


Equation 54: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 2B P721|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2B MANUAL OPEN
Manual Open OUTPUTS: HOLD ON PRI=2,2
M1-22-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P723|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2B MANUAL AUTO
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P722|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
END:

Equation: 55 Label: Exhaust Damper 2B Manual Close


Equation 55: COMMENTS:
Exhaust INPUTS: STATUS ON
Damper 2B P722|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
Manual Close OUTPUTS: HOLD OFF PRI=2,2
M1-22-1|MRELAY|CPRESS|2ND FLR B RETURN AIR DAMPER RELAY
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P721|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2B MANUAL OPEN
HOLD OFF PRI=9,9
P723|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2B MANUAL AUTO
END:

7-74
4100ES Programming Example, Continued

Equation 56:
Exhaust Damper 2B Equation: 56 Label: Exhaust Damper 2B Automatic Status
Automatic Status COMMENTS:
INPUTS: NOT STATUS ON
P565|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR B MANUAL EXHAUST
AND NOT STATUS ON
P721|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2B MANUAL OPEN
AND NOT STATUS ON
P722|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2A MANUAL CLOSED
AND STATUS ON
P723|DIGITAL|UTILITY|EXHAUST DAMPER 2B MANUAL AUTO
OUTPUTS: TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P593|DIGITAL|UTILITY|2ND FLR ZONE B EXHAUST DAMPER AUTO
END:

7-75
Chapter 8.
Glossary of Terms

Introduction This chapter contains a glossary to terms that are used in this publication

In this Chapter Refer to the page number listed in this table for information on a specific topic.

Topic See Page #


Glossary of Terms 8-2

8-1
Glossary of Terms

Glossary Acceptance Tests – Tests designed to prove a smoke control system is capable of doing what is
designed to do.
AHJ – The “Authority Having Jurisdiction” is the organization, office, or individual responsible
for approving equipment, an installation, or a procedure.
Alarm Service – The service required following the receipt of an alarm signal.
Alarm Signal – A signal indicating an emergency requiring immediate action, as an alarm for fire
from a manual box, a waterflow alarm, an alarm from an automatic fire alarm system, or other
emergency signal.
Alarm System – A combination of compatible initiating devices, control panels, and notification
appliances designed and installed to produce an alarm signal in the event of fire.
Annunciator – A unit containing two or more identified targets or indicator lamps in which each
target or lamp indicates the circuit, condition, or location to be annunciated.
Auxiliarized Local System – A local system that is connected to the municipal alarm facilities.
Auxiliarized Proprietary System – A proprietary system that is connected to the municipal alarm
facilities.
Auxiliary Protective Signaling System – A connection to the municipal fire alarm system to
transmit an alarm of fire to the municipal communications center. Fire alarms from an auxiliary
alarm system are received at the municipal communications center on the same equipment and by
the same alerting methods as alarms transmitted from municipal fire alarm boxes located on
streets.
Auxiliary Trip Relay – A relay used to operate a municipal master box from an auxiliarized
control panel.
Bell, Single Stroke – A bell whose gong is struck only once each time operating energy is applied.
Bell, Vibrating – A bell that rings continuously as long as operating power is applied.
Box (or Station), Fire Alarm – (1) Non-coded. A manually operated device that, when operated,
closes or opens one or more sets of contacts and generally locks the contacts in the operated
position until the box is reset. (2) Coded. A manually operated device in which the act of pulling a
lever causes the transmission of not less than three rounds of coded alarm signals. Similar to the
non-coded type, except that instead of a manually operated switch, a mechanism to rotate a code
wheel is utilized. Rotation of the code wheel, in turn, causes an electrical circuit to be alternately
opened and closed, or closed and opened, thus surrounding a coded alarm that identifies the
location of the box. The code wheel is cut for the individual code to be transmitted by the device
and can operate by clockwork or by an electric motor. Clockwork transmitters can be pre-wound
or can be wound by the pulling of the alarm lever. Usually the box is designed to repeat its code
four times and automatically come to rest. Pre-wound transmitters must sound a trouble signal
when they required rewinding. Solid state electronic coding devices are also used in conjunction
with the fire alarm control unit to produce coded sounding of the audible signaling appliances.
Break-glass Box (or Station) – A break-glass box is one in which it is necessary to break a
special element in order to operate the box.

Continued on next page

8-2
Glossary of Terms, Continued

Glossary Bypass Pressure Control System – The bypass-around supply fan can actually be placed at any
level. The bypass duct dampers are controlled by one or more static pressure sensors located
between the stairtower and the building. In addition, a manually operated damper may be located
at the top of the stairtower for smoke purging by the Fire Department.
CC – Custom Control.
Central Station System – A system, or group of systems, in which the operations of circuits and
devices are signaled automatically to, recorded in, maintained, and supervised from an approved
central station having competent and experienced observers and operators who, upon receipt of a
signal, take the required action. Such systems are controlled and operated by a person, firm, or
corporation whose principal business is the furnishing and maintaining of supervised signaling
service.
Channel – A path for signal transmission between two or more stations or channel terminations.
A channel can consist wire, radio waves, or equivalent means of signal transmission.
Chimes – A single stroke or vibrating-type audible signal appliance that has a xylophone-type
striking bar.
Circuit Interface – A functional assembly that interfaces one or more of its initiating device
circuits with a signaling line circuit in a manner that permits the central supervising station to
indicate the status of each of its individual initiating device circuits.
Circuit – The conductors or radio channel, and associated equipment used to perform a definite
function in connection with an alarm system.
Coded Signal – A signal pulsed in a prescribed code for each round of transmission. A minimum
of three rounds and a minimum of three impulses are required for an alarm signal.
Combination Detector – A device that either (1) responds to more than one of the fire
phenomena such as smoke, heat, flame, and fire gas or (2) employs more than one operating
principle to sense one of these phenomena. Typical examples are (1) a combination of heat
detector with a smoke detector, or (2) a combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature heat
detector.
Combination System – A local protective signaling system for fire alarm, supervisory, or guard
tour supervisory service whose components may be used in whole or in part in common with a
non-fire signaling system such as a paging system, a burglar alarm system, a musical program
system, or a process monitoring service system, without degradation of or hazard to the protective
signaling system.
Communication Channel – A signaling channel (usually leased from a communication utility
company) having two or more terminal locations and a suitable information handling capacity
depending on the characteristics of the system used. One terminal location is at the central
supervising station and the other terminal location or locations are sources from which are
transmitted alarm signals, supervisory signals, trouble signals, and such other signals as the central
supervising station is prepared to receive and interpret.
Compensated System – Adjust the airflow to make up for pressure lost through open doors.
A compensated system can use dampers (or vents) to relieve excess pressure in the stairtower to
ensure that the pressure does not go over the maximum limit.

Continued on next page

8-3
Glossary of Terms, Continued

Glossary Control Unit – A device with the control circuits necessary to (a) furnish power to a fire alarm
system; (b) receive signals from alarm initiating devices and transmit them to audible alarm
notification appliances and accessory equipment; and (c) electrically supervise the system
installation wiring and primary (main) power. The control unit can be contained in one or more
cabinets in adjacent or remote locations.
Dedicated Smoke Control Components – Solely used for smoke control functions and are not
operated in a non-emergency condition. Dedicated system equipment is therefore required to
incorporate an automatic weekly self-test or each smoke control function.
Dedicated Smoke Control System – Installed in a building for the sole purpose of controlling
smoke.
Delinquency Signals – A signal indicating the need of action in connection with the supervision
of guards or system attendants.
Duct System – Use bypass dampers and ducts to control the amount of air flowing from the fan to
the outlets. The bypass dampers are opened when the stairtower is at the proper pressure, so that
excess air flows not into the duct system, but into the bypass duct and back to the air inlet.
Emergency Voice/Alarm Communication Systems – A system that provides dedicated manual
or automatic, or both, facilities for originating and distributing voice instructions, as well as alert
and evacuating signals pertaining to a fire emergency to the occupants of a building.
EOL Device – End of Line Device. A device used to terminate a supervised circuit.
EOLR – End of Line Resistor.
EP Damper Control – Electrical to Pressure Damper Control. This type of damper control may
not be commonly used due to lack of full damper position sensing.
FACP – Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Fault – An open, ground, or short condition on any line(s) extending from a control unit, which
could prevent normal operation.
FDM – Frequency Division Multiplexing. A signaling method characterized by the simultaneous
transmission of more than one signal in a communication channel. Signals from one or multiple
terminal locations are distinguished from one another by virtue of each signal being assigned to a
separate frequency or combination of frequencies.
Fire Dampers – Dampers that block a fire from penetrating a fire rated partition via a duct.
These dampers are normally-open, held in place by a fusible link. The specifications for fire
dampers appear in UL Standard 555, Standard for Fire Dampers.
Fire Suppression System – Limits the growth rate of a fire, but does not eliminate or limit smoke.
Fire-Rated Ceiling – A ceiling made of fire-resistant materials.
Fire-Rated Partition – A fire partition is a wall that is built of fire resistant materials and that
reaches from floor to ceiling.
Flame Detector – A device that detects infrared, or ultraviolet, or visible radiation produced by a
fire.
FSCS – Firefighter’s Smoke Control Station. A graphic annunciating control panel that gives
firefighters information about the state of the smoke control system as well as manual control over
all of its components.
Ground Fault Detector – Detects the presence of a ground condition on system wiring.

Continued on next page

8-4
Glossary of Terms, Continued

Glossary Ground Fault – A condition in which the resistance between a conductor and ground reaches an
unacceptably low level.
Heat Detector – A device which detects abnormally high temperature or rate-of-temperature rise.
Horns – An audible signal appliance in which energy produces a sound by imparting motion to a
flexible component that vibrates at some nominal frequency.
HVAC system – Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning system.
IDC – Initiating Device Circuit.
Initiating Device – A manually or automatically operated device, the normal intended operation
of which results in a fire alarm or supervisory signal indication from the control unit. Examples of
alarm signal initiating devices are thermostats, manual boxes, smoke detectors, and waterflow
switches. Examples of supervisory signal initiating devices are water level indicators, sprinkler-
system valve-position switches, pressure supervisory transmitters, and water temperature switches.
Initiating Device Circuit – A circuit to which automatic or manual signal initiating devices such
as fire alarm boxes, fire detectors, and waterflow alarm devices are connected.
Labeled – Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol or other identifying
mark of an organization acceptable to the “Authority Having Jurisdiction” and concerned with
product evaluation, that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or
materials and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards
or performance in a specified manner.
Leg Facility – That part of a signaling line circuit connecting each protected building to the trunk
facility or directly to the central supervising station.
Listed – Equipment or materials included in a list published by an organization acceptable to the
“Authority Having Jurisdiction” and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic
inspection of production of listed equipment or materials periodic inspection of production of
listed equipment or materials and whose listing states either that the equipment or material meets
appropriate standards or has been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner.
Local Alarm System – A local system sounding an alarm as the result of the manual operation of
a fire alarm box or the operation of protection equipment or systems, such as water flowing in a
sprinkler system, the discharge of carbon dioxide, the detection of smoke, or the detection of heat.
Local Energy Auxiliary Alarm System – An auxiliary alarm system that employs a locally
complete arrangement of parts, initiating devices, relays, power supply, and associated
components to automatically trip a municipal transmitter or master box over electric circuits that
are electrically isolated from the municipal system circuits.
Local Supervisory System – A local system arranged to supervise the performance of guard
tours, or the operative condition of automatic sprinkler systems or other systems for the protection
of life and property against the fire hazard.
Local System – A local system is one that produces a signal at the premises protected.
Maintenance – Repair service, indicating periodic inspections and tests, required to keep the
protective signaling system and its component parts in an operative condition at all times, together
with replacement of the system of its components, when for any reason they become
undependable of inoperative.

Continued on next page

8-5
Glossary of Terms, Continued

Glossary Master Box – A municipal fire alarm box that may also be operated by remote means.
Multiplexing – A signaling method characterized by the simultaneous or sequential transmission,
or both, and reception of multiple signals in a communication channel including means for
positively identifying each signal.
Municipal Communications Center – The building or portion of a building used to house the
central operating part of the fire alarm system; usually the place where the necessary testing,
switching, receiving, retransmitting, and power supply devices are located.
Municipal Fire Alarm Box – A specially manufactured enclosure housing a manually operated
transmitter used to send an alarm to the municipal communications center.
Municipal Transmitter – A specially manufactured enclosure housing a transmitter that can only
be tripped remotely, used to send an alarm to the municipal communications center.
NDU – Network Display Unit.
Negative Air Pressure Technique – Pulls the smoke out of the area and vents it outside of the
building.
Non-coded Signal. – Signal from any notification appliance that is energized continuously.
Non-Compensated System. – Simply turn on a fan to pressurize the stairtower. The fan speed
does not change to compensate for doors opening and closing. The more doors that are open, the
more the pressure differential between the stairtower and the building drops.
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control Components – Consists of HVAC components within a building
which are operated regularly. The normal “comfort” level associated with the proper operation of
the equipment serves as the means of maintaining system integrity.
Non-Dedicated Smoke Control System – Uses parts of the HVAC system to control smoke.
Normal Stack Effect – An upward movement of air within the building.
Notification Appliance – Any audible or visible signal employed to indicate a fire, supervisory,
or trouble condition. Examples of audible signal appliances are bells, horns, sirens, electronic
horns, buzzers, and chimes. A visible indicator consists of a lamp, target, meter deflection, or
equivalent.
Notification Appliance Circuit – A circuit or path directly connected to an notification
appliance(s) such as bell, horns, chimes, or others.
NPU – Networking Processing Unit.
Operational Tests – Test that make sure the components and subsystems of the smoke control
system are installed correctly.
Paging System – A system intended to page one or more persons such as by means of voice over
loudspeaker stations located throughout the premises or by means of coded audible signal or
visual signals similarly distributed, or by means of lamp annunciators located throughout the
premises.
Permanent Visual Record (Recording) – Immediately readable, not easily alterable print, slash,
punch, etc., listing all occurrences of status change.
Piston Effect – Transient pressures produced when an elevator car moves inside the shaft during a
smoke emergency. This “piston effect” can pull smoke into a normally pressurized elevator lobby
or elevator; shaft.
Continued on next page

8-6
Glossary of Terms, Continued

Glossary Proprietary Protective Signaling System – An installation of protective signaling systems that
serve contiguous and noncontiguous properties under one ownership from a central supervising
station located at the protected property, where trained, competent personnel are in constant
attendance. This includes the central supervising station, power supplies, signal-initiating devices,
initiating device circuits, signal notification appliances, equipment for the automatic, permanent
visual recording of signals, and equipment for the operation of emergency building control
services.
Protective Signaling Systems – Electrically operated circuits, instruments, and devices, together
with the necessary electrical energy, designed to transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals
necessary for the protection of life and property.
Rectifier – An electrical device without moving parts that changes alternating current to direct
current.
Remote Station Protective Signaling System – An installation using supervised dedicated
circuits, installed to transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals from one or more protected
premises to a remote location at which appropriate action is taken.
Repeater Facility – Equipment needed to relay signals between the protected premises and the
central supervising action.
Reverse Stack Effect – Downward movement of air within the building.
RUI – Remote Unit Interface communications
SLC – Signaling Line Circuit (Path). A circuit or path (channel or trunk and leg) over which
multiple signals are transmitted and received.
Smoke Barriers – Barriers that prevent smoke from passing through them.
Smoke Control System – A system that employs motorized fans to create air pressure differences
and positive or negative airflows to limit and control the movement of smoke and other noxious
gases. Provides safe zones and tolerable conditions along exit routes but can do little to control
fire.
Smoke Control Zones – A zone must be separated from other zones by smoke dampers, airtight
doors, and smoke-proof barriers.
Smoke Damper – (1)A damper that prevents smoke from passing through when fully closed.
(2) Dampers that meet the requirements given in UL 555S, Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers
for Use in Smoke Controls Systems. (3) In a smoke control system, the damper must be fitted with
the end-position switches to provide feedback to the smoke control system.
Smoke Detector – A device that detects visible or invisible particles of combustion.
Spacing – A horizontal measured dimension relating to the allowable coverage of fire detectors.
Stairtower – A stairwell with a ventilation system that is located from the main building.
Supervision Service – The service required to monitor performance of guard patrols and the
operative condition of automatic sprinkler system and of other systems for the protection life and
property.
Supervision – The term supervised refers to monitoring of the circuit, switch, or device in such a
manner that a trouble signal is received when a fault that would prevent normal operation of the
system occurs.

Continued on next page

8-7
Glossary of Terms, Continued

Glossary Supervisory Signal – A signal indicating the need of action in connection with the supervision of
guard tours, sprinkler and other extinguishing system standards and designated as such by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
System Flexibility – Using features that allow for easy adjustment of a particular system to meet
the demands of a given situation.
Tenable Environment – As defined by the NFPA, an environment in which the quantity and
location of smoke is limited or otherwise restricted to allow for ready evacuation though the space.
Transmitter – A system component to which initiating devices or groups of initiating devices are
connected. The component transmits signals to the central supervising station indicating the status
of the initiating devices and the initiating device circuits.
Trouble Signal – An audible signal indicating trouble of any nature, such as a circuit break or
ground, occurring in the devices or wiring associated with a protective signaling system.
TSW – TrueSite Workstation System. The 4190 TSW provides a graphical user workstation
within the Simplex Smoke System.
Visible Signal – A visible signal is the response to the operation of an initiating device by one or
more direct or indirect visible notification appliances. For a direct visible signal, the sole means of
notification is by illumination of the area surrounding the visible signaling appliance.
Waterflow Switch – An assembly approved for the service and so constructed and installed that
any flow of water from a sprinkler system equal to or greater than that from a single automatic
sprinkler of the smallest orifice size installed on the system will result in activation of this switch
and subsequently indicate an alarm condition.
Zone – A designed area of a building. Commonly, zones within a building are annunciated to
rapidly locate a fire.

8-8
Index

Emergency Operation, 5-2


2  end-range switches, 1-20
Equation 1
24-Point I/O Graphic Interface, 3-5
Start Self Test, 5-3
Equation 2
4  Turn ON Stair Pressure Fan, 5-3
4190 Information Management System, 3-5 Equation 3
Test Stairwell Air Pressure, 5-4
A  Equation 4
End of Program, 5-4
acceptance tests, 1-20 Test Stairwell Air Pressure, 5-4
additional documentation, 1-20
air inlets and outlets, 1-12 F 
air pressure, 1-1, 1-11
air pressure differential, 1-3 fans, 3-8
air pressure, differences in, 1-3 fans and duct work, 1-11
amber/orange indicators, 3-8 fire control system, 1-9
ASHRAE, 1-15 fire damper, 1-12
audible signal, 3-9 fire detection system, 1-19
automatic door closing mechanism, 1-14 fire extinguishers, gas-based, 1-9
automatic fire suppression systems, 1-2 fire suppression systems, 1-2
fire zone, 1-5
B  Firefighter Smoke Control Station, 3-7
Firefighter's Smoke Control Station (FSCS),
bypass duct dampers, 1-17 1-19
bypass pressure control system, 1-17 fire-rated ceiling, 1-11
fire-rated partition, 1-11
C  FSCS graphic, 3-8
causes of smoke movement, 1-6 FSCS indicators, 1-20
buoyancy, 1-6
expansion, 1-6 G 
HVAC system, 1-6 gaseous agent fire suppression system, 1-2
stack effect, 1-6 ground-level stairtower, 1-17
wind, 1-6
Cautions and Warnings, iv H 
clear faults button, 3-9
compensated, 1-15 HVAC system, 1-11
compensated stairtower smoke control
system, 1-17 I 
IAM, 3-6
D  ideal stairtower, 1-14
dampers, 3-8 indicator lights, 1-20
dedicated damper control, 4-6
dedicated fan control, 4-8 L 
dedicated smoke control, 2-3
lamp test button, 1-20, 3-9
dedicated smoke control system, 1-8 LCD Annunciator, 3-6
Dedicated Smoke Control System Weekly
Self-Test, 5-2, 5-3

dedicated smoke control system wiring, 4-6
dedicated system, 1-13 managing smoke movement, 1-7
duct smoke detector with relay, 3-6 barriers, 1-7
smoke vents and smoke shafts, 1-7
E  manual control panel, 1-19
manual fire alarm pull boxes, 2-4
elevator shafts, 1-18 manual pull boxes, 1-9
IN-1
manual pull stations, 1-19 smoke control system, 1-9
master key-switch, 3-8 Smoke Control System Custom Control
monitored switches, 2-3 Equations, 5-5
smoke control systems, 1-1
N  smoke control zones, 1-5
smoke damper, 1-11
National Fire Protection Association, 1-9 smoke dampers, 1-12
negative air pressure technique, 1-4
smoke management, 3-8
Network Display Unit (NDU), 3-6 smoke migration, 1-18
NFPA 101, 1-14 smoke zones, 3-8
NFPA 90A, 1-11
stack effect, 1-3
NFPA 92A, 1-9, 1-11, 1-14, 2-4 stairtower, 1-13
non-compensated, 1-15 stairtower pressurization by multiple
non-dedicated damper control, 4-10 injection, 1-14
non-dedicated fan control, 4-13 Stairtower smoke control systems, 1-15
non-dedicated smoke control, 2-3
status indicators, 3-8
non-dedicated systems, 1-20 System Accessories, 3-6
O  T 
operational tests, 1-20
tenable environment, 1-8, 1-10
transient pressures, 1-18

piston effect, 1-18 U 
positive air pressure, zones, 1-4
UL 555, 1-12
pressure buildup, 1-11 UL 555S, 1-12
pressure differential, 1-14 UL 864, 1-9
pressure monitor, 1-20
pressurizing an elevator, 1-18

proof sensors, 1-20, 2-3
vane or pressure differential switches, 2-3


smoke barriers, 1-11
smoke control interconnections, 4-2 ZAM, 3-6
Smoke Control Program Requirements, 5-2

IN-2
IN-8-1
574-465
Rev. F

© 2004 – 2012 Tyco Fire Protection Products. Specifications and other information shown were current as of publication and are subject to change without notice.
8-1

You might also like